Yamaha CVP-701 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Instrumentos musicales
Tipo
El manual del propietario
CVP
-
701
Reference Manual
This Reference Manual explains advanced features of this instrument that are not explained in the Owner’s Manual.
Please read the Owner’s Manual first, before reading this Reference Manual.
EN
2 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Contents
1 Piano Room – Enjoying Piano Performance – 3
2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3
Voice Characteristics .........................................................3
Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices
from the Panel....................................................................5
Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for
VRM Voices .......................................................................5
Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off
Sound for Piano Voices .....................................................6
Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices ....................7
Selecting the Harmony/Echo type......................................8
Pitch-Related Settings .......................................................9
Editing Voices (Voice Set) ...............................................12
Editing Organ Flutes Parameters.....................................17
3
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment
–18
Style Playback Settings ...................................................18
Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while
Playing Bass with Your Left Hand....................................21
Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style
(Repertoire)......................................................................22
Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting .....................23
Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents ...................23
Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ............................24
4 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
38
Editing Music Notation Settings .......................................38
Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with
Song Playback.................................................................40
Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings,
Channel settings, Guide Function)...................................41
5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your
Performance via MIDI – 46
Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies ..............46
Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ...........................49
6 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playback and
Recording Audio Files – 66
7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and
Singing Along with Your Performance – 66
Making and Saving the Microphone Settings
(Vocal/Talk)......................................................................66
8 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice,
Style, etc.) for Each Song – 69
Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/
STYLE) ............................................................................69
Creating a Set of Favorite Records..................................71
Editing Records................................................................72
Saving the Record as a Single File..................................73
9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling
Custom Panel Setups – 74
Deleting or Renaming the Registration............................74
Confirming the Registration Memory Information ............75
Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) .....................76
Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order
(Registration Sequence) ..................................................76
10 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal
Balance – 79
Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters ......................................79
Editing FILTER Parameters .............................................81
Editing TUNE Parameters................................................81
Editing EFFECT Parameters ...........................................82
Editing EQ Parameters ....................................................84
Selecting the Master EQ Type .........................................85
Editing Master Compressor Settings ...............................86
11 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other
Devices – 88
Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings .................................88
Wireless LAN Settings .....................................................92
MIDI Settings ...................................................................94
12 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 100
CONFIG1 .......................................................................100
CONFIG2 .......................................................................102
PARAMETER LOCK......................................................104
USB................................................................................104
OWNER .........................................................................105
BACKUP/RESTORE......................................................105
SETUP FILES ................................................................106
RESET ...........................................................................107
Index 108
* Each chapter in this Reference Manual corresponds to the relevant chapters in the Owner’s Manual
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat dif-
ferent from those on your instrument.
The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Using the PDF manual
To quickly jump to items and topics of interest, click on the desired items in the “Bookmarks” index to the left
of the main display window. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.)
Click the page numbers that appear in this manual to go directly to the corresponding page.
Select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a keyword to locate related informa-
tion anywhere in the document.
NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used.
2
1
CVP-701 Reference Manual 3
Piano Room
– Enjoying Piano Performance –
These operations are fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in
the Owner’s Manual.
Voices
– Playing the Keyboard –
Contents
Voice Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Selecting the Harmony/Echo type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Pitch-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
• Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
• Scale Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
• Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Editing Voices (Voice Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
• Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
• Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Editing Organ Flutes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Voice name in the Voice Selection display.
Voice Characteristics
VRM
(Virtual Resonance
Modeling)
See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.
Natural! Natural! Voices are high quality sounds on many specialist sampling techniques.
They are especially suited to recreating Piano and other keyboard instruments.
Live! Live! Voices feature stereo sampling, to reproduce accurately the stereo image of
an acoustic instrument, as well as the ambience of the room it was recorded in.
S.Art!
(Super Articulation)
See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
4 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
NOTE MegaVoices are not compatible with other models even though the model may have those types of Voices installed. Any Song or Style data you’ve created
on the instrument using these Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments.
NOTE MegaVoices sound differently depending on the keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you apply a harmony or echo effect, change the transpose
setting or change the Voice Set parameters, unexpected or undesired sounds may result.
Cool! Cool! Voices reproduce the complex characteristics of Electric Instruments, by
utilizing sophisticated programming techniques in both voicing, and the use of
DSP effects.
Sweet! Sweet! Voices are acoustic instruments which feature the sampled vibrato of the
original player, creating a far more realistic and emotional performance than
synthesized vibrato.
Drums Drum & Percussion instruments are mapped across the keyboard so you can play
them directly, or use in music production.
Live! Drums Stereo sampling is used for these high definition Drum and Percussion
instruments, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly,
or use in music production.
SFX Special percussion and sound effects are mapped across the keyboard, so you can
play them directly, or use in music production.
Live! SFX Stereo sampling is used for these high definition special percussion and sound
effects, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or
use in music production.
Organ Flutes! OrganFlutes! lets you create your own Organ registrations, by combining Organ
Flute Footages at different pitches, just like a real organ. See page 17 for details.
MegaVoice MegaVoice is a special Voice format designed for use in styles and songs, not for
live performance. Different velocity ranges are used to select dramatically
different playing styles simultaneously, and without changing the voice.
Actual sound maps for the MegaVoices are given in the separate Data List booklet
that comes with your instrument.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 5
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
The GM&XG Voices and MegaVoice cannot be directly called up from the VOICE category selection buttons.
However, they can be called up via panel operation by following the procedure below.
1 In the Main display, select the keyboard part to which the desired Voice is to be
assigned.
2 Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice Selection
display.
3 Press the [8] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories.
4 Press the [2] (P2) button to display Page 2.
5 Press the desired [A] – [J] button to call up the Voice Selection display of GM&XG
Voices, GM2 Voices, etc.
6 Select the desired Voice.
When you select a Piano Voice compatible with VRM (referred to as VRM Voices), you can adjust the depth
of the Reverb and Chorus effect that is applied to the VRM Voices.
1 Select the VRM Voice.
Press the VOICE category [PIANO] button to call up the Voice Selection display, then select a Voice
having a “VRM” indication above its name.
Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel
Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices
34
6 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [F] VOICE SETTING TAB [ ][ ] PIANO
3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “1. VRM/DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH/STRING
RESONANCE DEPTH/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH.
4 Use the [5]/[6] buttons for adjusting the reverb depth and the [7]/[8]
buttons for the chorus depth applied to the VRM Voices.
This setting is applied commonly to all parts for which VRM Voices are selected.
You can adjust the tuning curve and volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you
release a key) for Piano Voices.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [F] VOICE SETTING TAB [ ][ ] PIANO
2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TUNING CURVE/KEY OFF SAMPLING DEPTH.
Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for
Piano Voices
4
3
2
3
CVP-701 Reference Manual 7
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
3 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the appropriate settings or to adjust the
value.
When you select one of the specific Drum Kit Voices below, you can confirm the key assignments in the
Drum Kit Tutor display.
Compatible Drum Kit Voices:
StandardKit1, StandardKit2, HitKit, RoomKit, RockKit, JazzKit, BrushKit, SymphonyKit, StudioKit,
PowerKit1, PowerKit2, AcousticKit, RealDrums
Call up the Drum Kit Tutor display.
Select the compatible Drum Kit Voice in the Voice Selection display [8] MENU1 [4] (DRUM KIT)
NOTE The Drum Kit Tutor display is not available for some Drum Kit Voices for which the “DRUM KIT” button is not available in MENU1 at the bottom of the Voice
Selection display.
In the default setting, the C3-B3 range of the keyboard is shown for confirming the assignments. When you
press a key, the instrument name assigned to the key is shown in the display. To confirm other assignments
outside that range, use the [D]/[E] or [I]/[J] buttons to shift the keyboard illustration left or right by one octave
in the display, or press a key in another octave.
[3]/
[4]
TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you want the tuning
curve of the piano Voice to most accurately match that of other
instruments Voices.
STRETCH:
Tuning curve often employed by piano tuners to make the upper
octaves sound more natural. Best for solo piano performance.
FLAT:
Tuning curve in which the frequencies of the notes are repeated for
each octave over the entire keyboard range.
[5]/
[6]
KEY OFF SAMPLE Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound.
Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices
8 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
This function lets you apply harmonies to your right hand performance according to the chords you play with
your left hand, and trigger automatic echo or tremolo even by pressing a single note or two notes.
1 Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button.
2 Turn the Keyboard Harmony on by pressing the [I] (KEYBOARD HARMONY) button.
3 Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button.
4 Use the [1] – [3] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type.
The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied.
Harmony Types
When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to the note played in the right-
hand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord specified in the chord
section of the keyboard shown below.
If you want to use these Types, play back the style or set the “STOP ACMP” parameter (page 19) to a
setting other than “DISABLED.
Selecting the Harmony/Echo type
Harmony Types
These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the
keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard.
(Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.)
Multi Assign Type
This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right-hand section of the
keyboard.
Echo Types
These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the
keyboard in time with the currently set tempo.
Split Point
(for the Voice)
LEFT Voice and chord section
for Harmony effect
RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices
Chord section for Style playback
and Harmony effect
Chord section for Style playback
and Harmony effect
Split Point
Split Point
(for Style playback)
Split Point
LEFT Voice
RIGHT 1 and 2
Voices
CVP-701 Reference Manual 9
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
Multi Assign Type
The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of
the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both keyboard parts [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned
on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the
notes in the order you play.
Echo Types
When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is applied to the
note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the
[ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill only works when you hold
down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it
plays those notes alternately.
5 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings.
The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type.
Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument
You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument — a useful feature when playing the Clavinova along with
other instruments or CD music. Please note that the Tuning function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit
Voices with name “*** kit” and audio files.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE TAB [ ][ ]
MASTER TUNE
2 Use the [4]/[5] buttons to set the tuning in 0.2 Hz steps, from 414.8–466.8 Hz.
Press the both 4 or 5’s [
] and [
] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz.
[4] VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi
Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by
the Harmony/Echo effect.
[5] SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected
in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill
effects.
[6] ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi
Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the har-
mony/echo notes will be sounded.
[7] CHORD NOTE
ONLY
This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected.
When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to notes
(played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belong to a chord
played in the chord section of the keyboard.
[8] TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi
Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony
note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your
playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The
harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set
value).
Pitch-Related Settings
10 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
Scale Tuning
You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE TAB [ ][ ]
SCALE TUNE
2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale.
Preset Scale types
EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each
half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in
music today.
PURE MAJOR, PURE
MINOR
These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially
for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal
harmonies — such as choirs and a cappella singing.
PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a
series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this
tuning is slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for
some leads.
MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making
the major third interval more “in tune.It was especially popular from the 16th
century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale.
WERCKMEISTER,
KIRNBERGER
This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems,
which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean
scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique
character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and
Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the
harpsichord.
ARABIC1, ARABIC2 Use these tunings when playing Arabic music.
The tuning of each note for the
currently selected scale is shown.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 11
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
3 Change the following settings as necessary.
NOTE
To register the Scale Tune settings to the Registration Memory, be sure to checkmark the SCALE item in the REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display.
NOTE If a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of all VRM Voices is set to the same scale type as that of the RIGHT1 part. If a Voice other
than a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of any other VRM Voices is set to “Equal.”
Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons
You can determine to which part (keyboard, Song or both) the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons are applied. This
lets you transpose the pitch of the keyboard but not that of the Song (or vice versa) — allowing you to play
along with a Song in a more comfortable key, for example.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [D] CONTROLLER TA B [ ][ ] KEYBOARD/PANEL
2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TRANSPOSE ASSIGN.
3 Press the [4]/[5] buttons to select the desired transpose type.
You can confirm the setting here by viewing the pop-up window called up via the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons.
[2] BASE NOTE Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed,
the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch
relationship between the notes.
[3] –
[5]
TUNE Select the desired note to be tuned by using the [3] buttons and tune
it in cents by using the [4]/[5] buttons.
NOTE In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.)
[6]/
[7]
PART SELECT Select the part to which the Scale Tune setting is applied by using the
[6]/[7] buttons. Then press the [8] button to add a check-
mark or press the [8] button to remove the checkmark.
[8] MARK ON/OFF
KEYBOARD When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the pitch of key-
board played Voices and Style playback (controlled by the performance in the
chord section of the keyboard) — but they do not affect Song playback.
SONG When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect only the pitch of
Song playback.
MASTER When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the overall pitch
of the instrument, except audio playback.
12 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
The instrument has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters
of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER drive or
external devices for future recall.
1 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice).
Organ Flutes Voices have a different editing method than described here. For instructions on editing the
Organ Flutes Voices, see page 17.
2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as
necessary.
3 Press the [5] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display.
4 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.
For information on the available parameters in each display, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE
SET Displays” on page 13.
5 As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and
edit the Voice by using the [1] – [8] buttons.
By pressing the [D] (COMPARE) button, you can compare the sound of the edited Voice with the original
(unedited) Voice.
6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
Editing Voices (Voice Set)
4
6
5
CVP-701 Reference Manual 13
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays
The Voice Set parameters are organized into several different displays. The parameters in each display are
described separately, below.
NOTE The available parameters differ depending on the Voice.
COMMON Page
[1] VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice.
[2]/
[3]
TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the
volume responds to your playing strength.
DEPTH
Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the Voice
changes in response to your playing strength (velocity).
OFFSET
Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the
actual velocity effect.
[4]/
[5]
PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When
the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the R1/R2
parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part,
the LEFT parameter is available.
[6] MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or poly-
phonically.
[7] PORTAMENTO
TIME
Sets the portamento time (pitch transition time) when the edited Voice is
set to “MONO” above.
NOTE The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is a function that creates a
smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next.
0
64 127
64
127
0
64 127
64
127
Actual Velocity for
tone generator
Depth = 127 (twice)
Depth = 64 (normal)
Depth = 32 (half)
Depth = 0
TOUCH SENSE DEPTH
Changes to velocity curve according to
VelDepth (with Offset set to 64)
Received Velocity
(Actual KeyOn speed)
TOUCH SENSE OFFSET
Changes to velocity curve according to
VelOffset (with Depth set to 64)
Actual Velocity for
tone generator
Received Velocity
(Actual KeyOn speed)
Offset = 96 (+64)
Offset = 127 (+127)
Offset = 64 (normal)
Offset = 32 (-64)
Offset = 0 (-127)
Depends
on offset
Depends
on offset
14 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
CONTROLLER Page
1 CENTER PEDAL
2 LEFT PEDAL
These allow you to select the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal.
3 MODULATION
When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters
below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the
following parameters.
SOUND Page
FILTER
Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific
frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a
certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to
produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects.
[1] FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal. For details
on the pedal functions, see page 88.
[2] –
[8]
RIGHT 1,
RIGHT 2, LEFT,
etc.
Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the
respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the
function. For details, see page 88.
[2] FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter cutoff
frequency. For details about the filter, see page 14.
[3] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (vol-
ume).
[5] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the
vibrato effect.
[6] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modula-
tion, or the wah effect.
[7] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or
the tremolo effect.
[1]BRIGHT
(Brightness)
Determines the cutoff frequency or
effective frequency range of the fil-
ter (see diagram). Higher values
result in a brighter sound.
[2] HARMO.
(Harmonic
content)
Determines the emphasis given to
the cutoff frequency (resonance),
set in BRIGHT. above (see dia-
gram). Higher values result in a
more pronounced effect.
Volume
These frequencies are
“passed” by the filter.
Cutoff
range
Frequency
(pitch)
Cutoff Frequency
Volume
Frequency (pitch)
Resonance
CVP-701 Reference Manual 15
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
EG
The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the
sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound
characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick
attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a
sustained piano tone.
VIBRATO
Vibrato is a quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by
regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice.
EFFECT/EQ Page
1 REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH/VIB ROTOR
[3] ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the
key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack.
[4] DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly
lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay.
[5] RELES.
(Release)
Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is
released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay.
[6] DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a
more pronounced Vibrato.
[7] SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect.
[8] DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key
and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of
the Vibrato onset.
[1]/
[2]
REVERB
DEPTH
Adjusts the reverb depth. The setting cannot be changed when a
VRM Voice is selected.
[3]/
[4]
CHORUS
DEPTH
Adjusts the chorus depth. The setting cannot be changed when a
VRM Voice is selected.
[5] DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off.
[6] DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP depth.
If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the “2 DSP”
menu explained on page 16.
[7] VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type
parameter explained on page 16. Determines whether VibeRotor
should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice.
16 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
2 DSP
3 EQ
Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. For information about EQ, refer to
page 84.
HARMONY Page
Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Before you set these parameters, make sure the Right 1 part
is selected in the Main display. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo
type” page 8 in step 3.
Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.)
Each Voice is linked to its default VOICE SET parameter settings. Usually these settings are automatically
called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant
display as explained below.
For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect, set the KEYBOARD
HARMONY parameter to OFF (in the display explained below).
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [F] VOICE SETTING TAB [ ][ ] VOICE SET FILTER
2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part.
3 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings
(ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group.
[1] –
[4]
DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select the desired category
first, then a type.
[6] VARI. A Variation parameter is provided for each DSP type. By turning this
on or off, you can instantly and significantly change the sound of the
DSP effect. Here, you can edit the VARI. (Variation) on/off status and
the parameter value for each status (in DETAIL below).
[5]/
[7]
DETAIL Calls up the detailed setting display. Press the [5] button for edit-
ing the standard parameter value, and the [7] button for editing
the Variation parameter value.
In the detailed setting display, select the desired parameter by using
the [2] – [4] buttons then adjust the value by using the
[5] – [6] buttons. This differs depending on the effect type
and cannot be changed. Press the [EXIT] button to close the setting
display.
2
3
CVP-701 Reference Manual 17
Voices – Playing the Keyboard –
2
The Organ Flute Voices selected from the [ORGAN FLUTES] button can be edited by adjusting the footage
levers, adding the attack sound, applying effects and equalizer, etc.
NOTICE
After editing, go to the Voice Selection display by pressing the [I] (PRESETS) button and save the setting. The settings will be lost if you
select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
FOOTAGE Page
Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.
VOLUME/ATTACK Page
EFFECT/EQ Page
Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” Page explained on page 15.
Editing Organ Flutes Parameters
[1] VOL (Volume) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic
bar, the greater the volume.
[2]RESP
(Response)
Affects both the attack and release (page 15) portion of the sound,
increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and
release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the
slower the swell and release.
[3] VIB. SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the VIBRATO
ON/OFF ([F]/[G] buttons) and VIBRATO DEPTH ([H] button).
[4] MODE The MODE control selects one of two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the
FIRST mode, attack (percussive sound) is applied only to the first notes
played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any sub-
sequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode,
attack is applied equally to all notes.
[5] –
[7]
4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE
Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of
attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar,
the greater the attack sound volume.
[8] LENG (Length) Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter
decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar,
the longer the decay.
Same as the FOOTAGE
Page.
3
18 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
Styles
– Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
Contents
Style Playback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand. . . . . . . . . .21
Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
• Realtime Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
• Step Recording (Inputting events one by one). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
• Style Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
• Editing the Rhythmic Feel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
• Editing Data for Each Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
• Making Style File Format Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display below.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [G] STYLE SETTING
2 Use the [1] – [8] and [B]/[C]/[F] buttons for each setting.
Style Playback Settings
CVP-701 Reference Manual 19
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
[B] OTS LINK
TIMING
This applies to the OTS Link function. This parameter determines the
timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIA-
TION [A] – [D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.)
REAL TIME
One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN
VA R I AT I O N b u t t o n .
NEXT BAR
One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a
MAIN VARIATION button.
[C] STOP ACMP When the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on, [SYNC START] is off, and this
parameter is set to the value other than “DISABLED,” you can play
chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and
still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition — called “Stop
Accompaniment” — any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the
chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can determine
whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the
Stop Accompaniment status.
DISABLED
Disables the Stop Accompaniment feature. When Style playback is
stopped, any pressed notes in the chord section of the keyboard will not
be recognized as chords.
OFF
The chord played in the chord section will not sound.
STYLE
The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices for the
Pad part and the Bass channel of the selected Style.
FIXED
The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice,
regardless of the selected Style.
NOTE When the selected Style contains MegaVoices, unexpected sounds may result when this is set to
“STYLE.”
NOTE When you record a song, the chord detected by playing the Stop Accompaniment can be recorded
regardless of the setting here. Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data
will be recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF”
or “FIXED.”
NOTE When this is set to “DISABLED,” chords are not recognized while the Style is stopped. This is why
Keyboard Harmony (page 8) is not applied even if you play a chord in the chord section of the key-
board while the Style is stopped.
[F] ACMP ON/OFF
DEFAULT
Determines whether the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on or off when the
power is turned on.
[1]/
[2]
DYNAMICS
CONTROL
This determines how the Style playback volume changes depending on
the playing strength.
•WIDE........... The volume changes over a wide range.
•MEDIUM..... The volume changes over a medium range.
NARROW .... The volume changes over a narrow range.
•OFF.............. The volume is kept the same regardless of playing
strength.
20 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
[3]/
[4]
SYNCHRO
STOP
WINDOW
This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop
function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is
turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” the Synchro Stop
function is automatically cancelled if you hold a chord for longer than the
time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal,
letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if
you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop func-
tion works.
[5]/
[6]
SECTION SET Determines the default section that is automatically called up when
selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to
“OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained
even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A – D sec-
tions is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically
selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected
Style, MAIN C will be called up.
[7] TEMPO This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change
Styles. If you want to avoid changing the tempo when selecting another
Style, select LOCK or HOLD.
LOCK
The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained.
HOLD
The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained while Style is
played back and another Style is selected. While Style playback is
stopped and another Style is selected, the tempo changes to that of the ini-
tial default tempo for the selected Style.
RESET
The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected
Style.
[8] PART ON/OFF This determines whether the on/off status of the Style Channels (Parts)
changes or not when you change Styles. If you want to avoid changing
the Style Channel On/Off status when selecting another Style, select
LOCK or HOLD.
LOCK
The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained.
HOLD
The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained
while Style is played back and another Style is selected. While Style
playback is stopped and another Style is selected, all Style Channels are
set to On.
RESET
All Style Channels are set to On.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 21
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
By changing the Chord Detection area from the left-hand section to the right-hand section, you can play the
bass line with your left hand while using your right hand to control Style playback.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING TAB [ ][ ]
SPLIT POINT
2 Set the CHORD DETECTION AREA value to “UPPER” with the [1]/[2] buttons.
3 Press the [E] button to turn the MANUAL BASS function on.
With this setting, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section works as the Chord section as well as melody
performance. In this condition, note the following points:
In the right-hand (UPPER) section, you can specify the chord type as you play the melody.
The Bass Part Voice of the current Style is assigned to the Keyboard LEFT part. This is referred to as the
Manual Bass function, which can be turned off or on via the [E] button.
Chord Fingering is set to a special type (“FINGERED*”) automatically, in which you should press three or
more notes simultaneously for specifying the chord. Pressing two or fewer notes does not change the chord
type.
Split Point (STYLE) is unavailable.
Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass
with Your Left Hand
2
3
Split Point (STYLE) Split Point (LEFT)
LEFT Voice section
(LOWER section)
RIGHT 1, 2 Voices section
(UPPER section)
+
Chord Section
22 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
You can search for music pieces and songs that are most suitable for playing with the current Style by using
the Repertoire function. You can automatically call up appropriate settings such as Voice, effect and pedal by
selecting the desired music piece.
NOTE The settings shown here are Music Finder Records. You can choose additional settings by using the Music Finder feature.
1 Select the desired Style from the Style Selection display.
2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as
necessary.
3 Press the [4] (REPERTOIRE) button.
Various appropriate panel settings matching the selected Style will be shown in the display.
4 Use the [2] – [3] buttons to select the desired panel setting.
NOTE Depending on the particular selected Style, there may not be any panel settings in the Repertoire function.
Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire)
Before using the Repertoire function, you need to import Music Finder records (see instructions described
in the Owner's Manual, chapter 8).
34
CVP-701 Reference Manual 23
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
While the panel settings appropriate for each preset Style are pre-programmed as One Touch Settings, you
can also register your favorite settings to create original One Touch Settings. Because the One Touch Setting
data is included in a Style, the Save operation will be done as a Style on the Style Selection display.
1 Select the desired Style to correspond to your One Touch Setting.
2 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, effects, and so on) as desired.
3 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section.
4 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.
A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings.
5 Press [G] (YES) button to call up the Style Selection display and save the panel
settings as a Style file.
NOTICE
The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save
operation.
You can check the information of the One Touch Setting [1] – [4] assigned to currently selected Style.
1 In the Style Selection display, call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by
pressing the [8] button as necessary, then press the [6] (OTS INFO) button to call
up the Information display.
NOTE You can also call up the Information display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then pressing one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons.
2 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the Information display.
Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting
Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents
34
1
2
24 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
Styles are made up of fifteen different sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each section has eight separate
channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by
importing pattern data from other existing Styles.
You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Style can also
be edited.
Realtime Recording This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the keyboard. See
page 25.
Step Recording This method lets you to enter each note individually. See page 28.
Style Assembly This method lets you create a composite Style by combining various patterns
from the internal preset Styles or from Styles you have already created. See
page 28.
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [A] STYLE CREATOR
NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE.
There are several Pages (tabs) in the Style Creator display.
•BASIC Creates the basic settings of the Style. You can also record your performance in real-
time to create a new Style (Realtime Recording). See page 25.
ASSEMBLY Mixes the various parts (channels) from preset Styles or already created Styles to cre-
ate a new Style. See page 28.
•GROOVE
Changes the rhythmic feel of your created Style. See page 30.
CHANNEL Edits data for each channel — quantizing, changing velocity, etc. See page 32.
PARAMETER Changes the settings related for Style File Format. See page 33.
•EDIT Lets you enter notes one by one to create an original Style (Step Recording). See
page 28.
Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator)
Sections
Channels
CVP-701 Reference Manual 25
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
Realtime Recording
In the BASIC Page, you can create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using
realtime recording.
1 When you want to create a Style based on an existing Style, select the desired Style to
serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up the Style Creator display.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU2 [A] STYLE CREATOR
The BASIC Page is shown.
3 If you want to create a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button to
delete the data of all channels.
4 Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style.
First close the RECORD display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Then use the [3]/[4] buttons to
select the section to be recorded.
NOTE To call up the RECORD display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button.
NOTE You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons on the panel. Refer to step 3 on page 28.
NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations.
Realtime Recording Characteristics — Loop Recording and Overdub Recording
Loop Recording
Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also
done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two
measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop),
letting you record while hearing previously recorded material.
Overdub Recording
This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the
original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as
Rhythm Clear (page 27) and Delete (page 26).
For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated
many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new
material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material.
When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the
rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), you need to delete the original data before
recording.
5-2
5-14
26 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
5 Use the [5]/[6] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the
selected section, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the specified
length.
6 Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH)
button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8].
To cancel the selection, press the corresponding [1] – [8] button again.
7 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1] – [8] buttons and select the
desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels.
Press the [EXIT] button to close the Voice Selection display.
8 If necessary, delete a channel by simultaneously holding down the [J] (DELETE)
button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8].
You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again before releasing your finger from
the [J] button.
NOTE When recording channels BASS–PHR2 based on an existing Style, you have to delete the original data before recording.
Recordable Voices
RHY1 channel
Any except your original Organ Flute and Super Articulation Voices are recordable.
RHY2 channel
Only drum/SFX kits are recordable.
BASS–PHR2 channels
Any except your original Organ Flute, drum/SFX kits and Super Articulation Voices are recordable.
NOTE Preset Organ Flute Voices can be recorded to the RHY1 and BASS–PHR2 channels.
6
7
CVP-701 Reference Manual 27
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
9 Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
Playback of the specified section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop,
you can record individual sounds one by one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For
information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the section
“Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” below.
NOTE You can turn off the desired channels by pressing the corresponding [1] – [8] buttons.
10
To continue recording with another channel, repeat steps 6 – 9.
11
Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
12
Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display.
13
Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
Deleting recorded notes in the rhythm channel
When you are recording the rhythm channel (RHY1 or RHY2), you can delete a specific instrument
sound by simultaneously holding down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button and pressing the appropriate key
on the keyboard.
Rules when recording non-rhythm channels
Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G,
A, and B).
Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B).
Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted
depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. The chord which forms the basis for
this note conversion is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example
illustration above).
You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 34. Keep in
mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes
and recommended notes will also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see
page 34.
NOTE For the INTRO and ENDING sections, any desired chord or chord progression can be used.
CRC CRC
C = Chord note
C, R = Recommended note
28 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
Step Recording (Inputting events one by one)
In the EDIT Page, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is
essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 50) with the exception of the points listed below:
In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed.
This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed, depending on the selected section. For exam-
ple, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically
set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display.
Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1-16 tab display; however, they cannot be changed
in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display.
In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited (delete, copy,
or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System
Exclusive data cannot be entered.
For instructions on Step Recording, refer to pages 50 – 53. For information on the EDIT display (Event List
display), refer to page 63.
Style Assembly
Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing
internal Styles.
1 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up
the Style Creator display.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [A] STYLE CREATOR TAB [ ][ ] ASSEMBLY
3 Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style.
First call up the SECTION Selection display by pressing one of the Section buttons (INTRO, MAIN,
ENDING, etc.) on the panel. Then change the section as desired by using the [6]/[7] buttons and
actually enter the selection by pressing the [8] (OK) button.
NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 29
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
4 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A] – [D] and
[F] – [I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again.
Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection
display.
To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style.
5 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 4) by using the
[2]/[3] (SECTION) buttons.
6 Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 5) by using the [4]/
[5] (CHANNEL) buttons.
Repeat steps 4 – 6 above to replace the patterns of other channels.
7 Press the [J] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
Playing the Style During Style Assembly
While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style (to check the sound of your edits) and
conveniently select the method of playback. Use the [6]/[7] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style
Assembly display to select the playback method.
•SOLO
Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD
display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously.
•ON
Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to other than OFF in the
RECORD display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously.
•OFF
Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page.
4
65
[A] – [D],
[F] – [I]
buttons
30 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
Editing the Rhythmic Feel
1 In the GROOVE Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the
data by using the [1] – [8] buttons.
1 GROOVE
This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing
(clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style.
[1]/
[2]
ORIGINAL
BEAT
Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other
words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if
“12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets.
[3]/
[4]
BEAT
CONVERTER
Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL
BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIG-
INAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all
8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A”
and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set
to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting.
[5]/
[6]
SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depend-
ing on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the speci-
fied ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will
selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create
a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of
swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pro-
nounced.
[7]/
[8]
FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected sec-
tion. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while
“HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered set-
tings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to
the specified beat — but not including the first beat — will be played
early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In
all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium
effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect.
3
1
2
1
CVP-701 Reference Manual 31
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
2 DYNAMICS
This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings
can be applied individually to each channel or globally to all channels of the selected Style.
2 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display.
After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if
you are not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the
previous operation can be undone.
3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
[1]/
[2]
CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied.
[3]/
[4]
ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied — in other words, which notes in
the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings.
[6] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be
applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect.
[7] EXPAND/
COMP.
Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than
100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% com-
press it.
[8] BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values
above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce
it.
32 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
Editing Data for Each Channel
1 In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu.
1 QUANTIZE
Same as in the Song Creator (page 61), with the exception of the two additional available parameters
below.
2 VELOCITY CHANGE
Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here.
3 BAR COPY
This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within
the specified channel.
4 BAR CLEAR
This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel.
5 REMOVE EVENT
This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel.
2 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.
The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.
3 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to edit the data.
4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display.
After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if
you are not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous
operation can be undone.
[4] TOP Specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be
copied.
[5]LAST
[6] DEST Specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is
to be copied.
5
1
4
32
Eighth notes with swing
Sixteenth notes with swing
CVP-701 Reference Manual 33
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
Making Style File Format Settings
The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into
a single unified format. By using the Style Creator, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format
and freely create your own Styles.
The chart shown below indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the
rhythm track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature, in the PARAMETER Page.
Chord changes via the chord section of the keyboard.
Output
This instrument’s Styles are compatible with SFF GE — an enhanced format of the original SFF with
especially rich, expressive guitar parts.
NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE.
Source Pattern settings — SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD (page 34)
The Style data is appropriately converted depending on chord changes you make during your
performance. You can create the “Source Pattern” with the Style Creator, which determines how the
played chord will be converted. Here the “Source Chord” (page 34) can be set, allowing you to record
accompaniment channels.
Note Transposition settings — NTR and NTT (page 35)
This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to
be converted in response to chord changes.
Other settings — HIGH KEY, NOTE LIMIT and RTR (page 37)
Using the parameters of this group, you can fine-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you
play. For example, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic
as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range — ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural
range of the actual instrument (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds).
34 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
1 In the PARAMETER Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu.
For details of the edit menu, see page 34.
2 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited.
The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display.
3 Use the [3] – [8] buttons to edit the data.
For details on editable parameters, see pages 34 – 37.
4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.
1 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD
These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the
pattern). When you change Source Root/Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes
and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type.
NOTE When NTR is set to “Root Fixed,” NTT is set to “Bypass” and NTT BASS is set to “OFF,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed
to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels.
NOTE SOURCE ROOT/CHORD is not applied when NTR is set to GUITAR.
4
1
3
2
CRC CR CRC C RC CRC C CR CRC C CR
C
CCC CR
CCC C CR CCC C RC
CRC
RCR
CR CR
C
CR CCR
C
CCR
CC
CR
RRCCC
CC RC
C
CC RC
CC
CR CC
CC
CR C CR
C
CC RC C
C
CR
CCR
CR R RC
CCR
CCC
C
CCC
C
CRC
CC
CCC C
C
CRC CR
CC
CRC CC
C
CCC
CC
CCCR
RCC
CCC
RCC
CRC CRR
C
CRC
RCC
C
CCCR CC CCR CR
CMaj
Cm
7
C
CM
7
7
CM
(9)
C
(9)
6
Caug
Cm
6
Cm
7 7
7
Cm
5
7
Cm
(9)
Cm
(11)
CmM
7
7
CmM
(9)
Cdim
Cdim
7
C
(9)
7
C
(13)
7
C
(
9
)
7
Csus
4
C
1+8
C
1+5
C
5
7
C
6
Cmadd
9
7
CM
11
C
11
7
C
(
9
)
7
C aug
7
CM aug
7
C sus
4
7
Cadd
9
C
(
13
)
7
Csus
2
When the Source Root is C:
C = Chord notes
C, R = Recommended notes
CVP-701 Reference Manual 35
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
2 NTR/NTT
NTR (Note Transposition Rule)
NTT (Note Transposition Table)
When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS or ROOT FIXED
[3]/
[4]
NTR (Note
Transposition
Rule)
Determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when con-
verted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. Refer to
the list below.
[5] –
[7]
NTT (Note
Transposition
Table)
Sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Refer to the list
below.
[8]NTT BASS ON/
OFF
The channel for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass
root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument.
When NTR is set to GUITAR and this parameter is set to ON, only notes
assigned to bass will be played back by the bass root note.
ROOT TRANS
(Root Transpose)
When the root note is transposed, the interval
between notes is maintained. For example, the
notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3,
A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use
this setting for channels that contain melody
lines.
ROOT FIXED The note is kept as close as possible to the previ-
ous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3
and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3
when they are transposed to F. Use this setting
for channels that contain chord parts.
GUITAR This is exclusively for transposing guitar accompaniment. Notes are trans-
posed to approximate the chords played with natural guitar fingering.
BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do
any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used
only converts the notes by maintaining the pitch relationship between notes.
MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as
Phrase 1 and Phrase 2.
CHORD Suitable for chordal parts transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord
2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts.
MELODIC MINOR
When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table
lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes
from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semi-
tone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections
which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings.
MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and
diminished chords affect the 5th intervals of the Source Pattern.
When playing
a C major
chord.
When playing
an F major
chord.
When playing
a C major
chord.
When playing
an F major
chord.
36 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
When NTR is set to GUITAR
HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table
lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the
chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted
sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use
this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor
chords, such as Intros and Endings.
HARMONIC MINOR
5th
In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and
diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.
NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table
lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone.
When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third,
flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other
notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which
respond only to a major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings.
NATURAL MINOR
5th
In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and dimin-
ished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.
DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table
lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the
chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted
seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use
this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a major/minor
chord such as Intros and Endings.
DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished
chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern.
ALL-PURPOSE This table covers both strummed- and arpeggio-played sound.
STROKE Suitable for strumming sounds of the guitar. Some notes may sound as if
they are muted—this is the normal condition when chords are played on
guitar by strumming.
ARPEGGIO Suitable for arpeggio-played sound of the guitar. Using this table, four
notes arpeggio sounds most beautiful.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 37
Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment –
3
3 HIGH KEY / NOTE LIMIT
4 RTR (Retrigger Rule)
These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to
chord changes.
[4]/
[5]
HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for
the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest
key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is
effective only when the NTR parameter (page 35) is set to “Root Trans.
[6] NOTE LIMIT
LOW
These set the note range (highest and lowest notes) for Voices recorded to
the Style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that
the Voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes
outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low pic-
colo sounds).
[7] NOTE LIMIT
HIGH
STOP The notes stop sounding.
PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the
new chord.
PITCH SHIFT TO
ROOT
The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the
new chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same.
RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the
next chord.
RETRIGGER TO
ROOT
The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord.
However, the octave of the new note remains the same.
CM
C3-E3-G3
FM
F3-A3-C4
F
M
F
2-A
2-C
3
C
M
C
3-F3-G
3
Example — When the highest key is F
Root changes
Notes played
CM
E3-G3-C4
FM
F3-A3-C4
C
M
F3-G
3-C
4
Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4
Root changes
Notes played
High Limit
Low Limit
38 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
Song Playback
– Playing and Practicing Songs –
Contents
Editing Music Notation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function) . . .41
• Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
• Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
To view the music notation of the selected Song, press the [SCORE] button. You can change the notation
display as desired to suit your personal preferences. The settings here are maintained even when the power is
turned off.
NOTE You can save the setting here as a part of a Song by accessing [FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [B] SONG CREATOR TAB[ ][ ] SETUP. See
page 59.
Editing Music Notation Settings
[1] LEFT ON/
OFF
Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings,
this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go
to the detailed setting display (on page 39) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any
channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the display [FUNCTION]
TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [H] SONG SETTING TAB [ ][ ] GUIDE/
CHANNEL and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF”
(page 41). RIGHT (next parameter) and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same
time.
[2] RIGHT ON/
OFF
Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. RIGHT and LEFT (above)
cannot be turned off at the same time.
[3]CHORD
ON/OFF
Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected Song does not contain chord
data, chords are not displayed.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 39
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
Pressing the [8] (SET UP) button calls up the detailed setting display. You can set the
view type by using the [1] – [6] buttons, then press the [8] (OK) button.
[4]LYRICS
ON/OFF
Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected Song does not contain lyric
data, lyrics are not displayed. When the Song contains Pedal events, pressing these
buttons can display the Pedal events, instead of displaying Lyrics.
[5]NOTE ON/
OFF
Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). The note name is indicated at the left
of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be
moved to the top left of the note. When the Song contains Fingering events, pressing
these buttons can display the fingering, instead of displaying note names.
[6] COLOR
NOTE
When this is set to ON, the notes in the display are color-coded (C: red, D: yellow, E:
green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray).
[7] SIZE Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation.
[8] SET UP See below.
[1] LEFT CH Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/right-
hand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected.
AUTO
The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are
assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel
which is specified in [FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [H] SONG
SETTING TAB [ ][ ] GUIDE/CHANNEL (page 41).
1 – 16
Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1 – 16) to the respective left- or right-hand
parts.
OFF (LEFT CH only)
No channel assignment. This disables display of the left-hand key range.
[2]RIGHT CH
[3]/
[4]
KEY
SIGNATURE
This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a Song, at the stopped
position. This setting is useful for Songs you've recorded with key changes, so
the key signature changes are properly reflected in the notation.
[5] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift
or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular
note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the Song.
40 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9-16 in the Song data are replaced with
Style channels – allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords
along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at
the same time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder.
1 Select a Song.
2 Select a Style.
3 Press the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the
Auto Accompaniment function.
4 Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button to enable standby
— letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment
as soon as you start playing.
5 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button,
press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to enable synchronized
start for the Song.
6 Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button or play chords with your left hand.
The Song and Style starts playing. When you play chords, pressing the [SCORE] button and turning
CHORD on (page 38) allows you to see the chord information.
NOTE When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used.
When Song playback is stopped, the Style playback is also stopped at the same time.
[6] NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation
from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the
NOTE ON/OFF parameter above is set to ON.
A, B, C
Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B).
Fixed DO
Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected
language.
Movable DO
Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as
such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the
key of G major the root note of “Sol” would be indicated as “Do.” As with
“Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language.
Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback
CVP-701 Reference Manual 41
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
The instrument has a variety of Song playback functions — Repeat playback, various Guide settings, etc. —
which can be accessed in the display below.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [H] SONG SETTING
2 Select the desired page, GUIDE/CHANNEL or OTHERS, by using the TAB [ ][ ]
buttons.
Detailed settings for playback, such as Repeat mode, can be set in the OTHERS page of the Song Setting
display.
GUIDE/CHANNEL Page
Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel
settings, Guide Function)
[A]/[B] GUIDE MODE See page 43.
[C] GUIDE LAMP
[D] GUIDE LAMP
TIMING
[I] PHRASE
MARK REPEAT
Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed part of some Song data, which
specifies a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. When this is on,
the section corresponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is
repeatedly played back.
[2]/
[3]
TRACK 2
These parameters determine which MIDI channel in the Song data is assigned
to the Left- or Right-hand part of the Guide function and the Song Score
function.
[4]/
[5]
TRACK 1
[6]/
[7]
AUTO CH SET When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper MIDI channels for
the Right- and Left hand parts pre-programmed in the commercially
available Song data. Normally, this should be set to “ON.
42 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
OTHERS Page
[G] REPEAT MODE Determines the method of repeat playback.
OFF
Plays through the selected Song, then stops.
SINGLE
Plays through the selected Song repeatedly.
ALL
Continues playback through all the Songs in the specified folder
repeatedly.
RANDOM
Continues playback at random through all the Songs in the specified
folder repeatedly.
NOTE The preset Songs in the “Follow Lights” folder contain the Guide settings. These Songs are inap-
propriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat.
[H] CHORD
DETECTION
PRIORITY
Determines the priority of the chords for accompaniment, either the ones
contained in the MIDI Song being played back or the chords you play in
the chord section of the keyboard.
MIDI SONG: Gives priority to the chords contained in the MIDI Song.
KEYBOARD: Gives priority to the chords you play in the chord
section of the keyboard. Set this if you want to practice playing chords
with MIDI Song playback. Once you play in the chord section during
MIDI Song playback, the instrument ignores the chords contained in
the MIDI Song until the playback ends.
[I] FAST
FORWARD
TYPE
Determines the fast forward type of when pressing [FF] button during
MIDI Song playback.
Jump: Pressing [FF] button once instantly sets the playback position to
the next measure without sounding. Holding [FF] button scrolls
forward continuously.
Scrub: Pressing and holding [FF] button plays and sounds the MIDI
Song at high speed.
In the following cases, fast forwarding through a MIDI Song functions as
the Jump type even if Scrub is selected.
When MIDI Clock is set to External
When the MIDI Song is fast-forwarded by Phrase marks
NOTE Pressing [FF] button during while a MIDI Song is stopped functions as the Jump type.
[2]/
[3]
LYRICS
LANGUAGE
Determines the language of the displayed lyrics.
AUTO
When the language is specified in the Song data, the lyrics are displayed
accordingly. When the language is not specified in the Song data, the
lyrics language is regarded as INTERNATIONAL below.
INTERNATIONAL
Handles the displayed lyrics as a western language.
JAPANESE
Handles the displayed lyrics as Japanese.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 43
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function
The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play.
1 Select the desired Song for practicing the keyboard or singing.
2 Call up the setting display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [H] SONG SETTING TAB [ ][ ] GUIDE/CHANNEL
3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type.
Guide menu for keyboard practice
Follow Lights
With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play. Song playback
pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues.
•Any Key
With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in
time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the
keyboard in time with the music and Song playback continues.
•Your Tempo
The same as Follow Lights, except that Song playback matches the speed at which you play.
Guide menu for singing
•Karao-Key
This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This
is useful for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply
play a key on the keyboard (any key is fine) and Song playback continues.
[4]/
[5]
QUICK START On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the
Song (such as Voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first
measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the
instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest
possible speed, then automatically switches to the appropriate tempo at
the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible,
with a minimum pause for reading of data.
[6]/
[7]
P.A .T. Se e page 45.
44 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
4 Turn the [GUIDE] button on.
5 Call up the Score display by pressing the [SCORE] button.
6 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
Practice playing the keyboard or singing, along with the Guide type selected in step 3.
NOTE The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included). If the guide
lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively (page 41).
7 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback.
NOTE If you want to turn the guide lamps off, press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING display (in step 3 as described above).
NOTE You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 59). For Songs to which the Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be
automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected.
Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING)
Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 3 to select the timing by which the keyboard
guide lamps light.
•JUST
The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the same timing you should play.
•NEXT
The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music, indicating the notes you should play next. The guide
lamps flash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 45
Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs –
4
Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology
This feature lets you play your own backing parts on the keyboard along with Song playback, and have them
sound perfectly appropriate (even though you might be playing wrong notes).
1 Select a Song containing chord data.
The Performance Assistant Technology applies only to Songs containing chord data. To confirm whether
the selected Song contains chord data or not, return to the Main display, then start playback. If the current
Song contains chord data, the Main display shows the current chord type. After stopping playback, go to
the next step.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU1 [H] SONG SETTING TAB [ ][ ] OTHERS
3 Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology)
on.
4 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.
5 Play the keyboard.
Along with Song playback, try playing a bass line in the left hand area while playing various phrases or
chords in the right hand area. Even if you do not know what notes should be played, don’t worry and play
any keys as desired! Only the harmonically “correct” notes matching the current chord are sounded,
regardless of the notes you actually play.
6 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback.
7 Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. off.
NOTE Selecting another Song may reset P.A.T. to OFF.
Current chord
46 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Song Recording via MIDI
– Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
Contents
Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
• Recording a Style Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
• Recording a Melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
• Saving the Recorded Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
• Recording Melodies (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
• Recording Chords (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
• Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
• Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
• Editing Channel Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
• Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Here, you will learn how to record a style to channels 9 – 16 first and then a melody to channel 1 in a realtime
recording. The instructions hereafter assume the following panel settings as an example. Before starting
recording, make the panel settings as follows;
Turn the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button on, and then select the desired voice of the RIGHT1 part.
Turn the [LEFT] and [RIGHT2] parts off.
Select the desired Style.
Set the Fingering Type to “MULTI FINGER” (default setting):
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING TAB [ ][ ]
CHORD FINGERING
Recording a Style Performance
1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons
simultaneously.
A blank Song for recording is automatically set.
Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies
CVP-701 Reference Manual 47
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
2 Specify the target channel and part for recording.
2-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] – [8] buttons to
specify the desired channels (9 – 16) for recording.
As the default setting, Style parts (Rythm1-Phrase 2) are assigned to channels 9 – 16 as illustrated
on page 49. You can change the parts to be recorded by performing step 2-2.
2-2 Select the desired part which will be recorded to the channel specified in step 2-1 by using
the [C]/[D] buttons.
NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button.
3 Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button, then play the style by specifying the chords in
the chord section.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the Style. You can also start recording by pressing
SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Perform as desired, playing the Style by changing chords and/
or sections.
NOTE Make sure that the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button is turned on.
4 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop
recording.
5 To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
This finishes recording of the Style. Now, let’s record a melody to channel 1.
2-1
2-2
Chord section
Split Point (F 2 as default)
48 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Recording a Melody
6 Specify the target channel and part for recording.
6-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] button to specify
channel 1 for recording.
6-2 Select “RIGHT1” by using the [C]/[D] buttons.
NOTICE
Previously recorded data will be overwritten if you set channels which have recorded data to “REC.”
NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button.
7 Play a melody.
Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard, or when you press the SONG
CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. You can play a melody while listening to the already recorded Style
performance.
When recording another channel, you can turn already recorded channels on or off in the display.
8 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop
recording.
9 To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
This finishes recording of the Style and the melody. Now, let’s save the recorded performance as a file (below).
Saving the Recorded Performance
10
Save the recorded performance as a file. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up
the Song Selection display. The recorded performance will be saved as a file in the
Song Selection display. For the following instructions, see “Saving Files” in the
Owners Manual.
NOTICE
The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 49
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
The Owner’s Manual covers how to create an original Song by recording your keyboard performance (called
“Realtime Recording”). This Reference Manual shows how to create an original Song by entering notes one
by one (called “Step Recording”) and how to improve an already created Song by editing the detailed
parameters.
Realtime Recording and Step Recording
When creating a Song, these two Recording methods are available. With Realtime Recording, this instrument
records the performance data as it is played. With Step Recording, you can compose your performance by
“writing” it down one event at a time. This chapter primarily covers the instructions for Step Recording.
MIDI Song Data Structure
A MIDI Song consists of 16 MIDI channels. You can create data of a MIDI Song by recording your
performance to a specific channel or channels in realtime, or by executing Step Recording.
Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator)
Song
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
Channel 13
Channel 14
Channel 15
Channel 16
System Exclusive
Lyrics
Recording Part
(Default settings)
Right 1
Left
Right 2
Rhythm 1
Rhythm 2
Bass
Chord 1
Chord 2
Pad
Phrase 1
Phrase 2
Keyboard Performance
Realtime Recording:
By default, your keyboard performance will be
recorded to MIDI channels 1 – 3. You can also
record additional performances to channels 4 – 8.
Step Recording:
Without specifying the keyboard part, you can input
melodies or notes one by one to the desired channel.
Style Playback
Realtime Recording:
By default, Style playback will be recorded to MIDI
channels 9 – 16.
Step Recording:
After inputting the Chord change/Section change
events, touch [Expand] to actually record the note
data to MIDI channels 9 – 16.
50 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Song Creator Display Structure
The Song Creator can be called up via [FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [B] SONG CREATOR.
There are several Pages (tabs) in the Song Creator display.
•REC MODE For re-recording the Song. See page 57.
•SETUP For selecting the panel setups to be recorded to the top position of the Song. See page 59.
CHANNEL
For editing the Channel events. See page 60.
CHORD For recording the Chords and Sections with timing (page 54) or editing them (page 64).
•1-16 For recording the melodies (Step Recording; see below) or editing them (page 64).
•SYS/EX. For editing the System Exclusive events (tempo, time signature, etc.). See page 64.
•LYRICS For inputting/editing the Song name and lyrics. See page 65.
Recording Melodies (Step Recording)
1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons
simultaneously.
A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.
NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [B] SONG CREATOR TAB [ ][ ] 1-16
3 Press the [F] button to select the channel for recording.
4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.
3
4
CVP-701 Reference Manual 51
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
5 Start Step Recording by using the [A] – [J] buttons and [1] – [8] buttons, as
well as the keyboard.
Refer to the example on page 52 for specific instructions.
[A]/[B]/[C] Moves the cursor in the list.
[G] Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. The velocity
value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity
value, the louder the sound becomes.
Kbd.Vel: Actual resulting velocity
fff: 127
ff: 111
f: 95
mf: 79
mp: 63
p: 47
pp: 31
ppp:15
[H] Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered.
Normal: 80%
Tenuto: 99%
Staccato: 40%
Staccatissimo: 20%
Manual: The gate time can be set to any desired percentage by using the
[DATA ENTRY] dial.
[I] Determines the note type to be entered: normal, dotted or triplet.
[J] DELETE Deletes the selected data.
[1] BAR Sets the position of the note to be entered.
[2]BEAT
[3]CLK
[4] –
[8]
Determines the note length to be entered: whole-note, half-note, quarter-note,
eighth-note or sixteenth-note.
When a note is input, the location
(bar: beat: clock), note name,
velocity and length are shown as a
list.
52 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Example of Step Recording — Melodies
In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while
executing the operation.
Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Recording display.
NOTE Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here.
NOTE The illustration given here is just a sample for entering. Non-note musical performance symbols will not be shown in the Score display, even if you've
entered them.
1 Enter the first and second notes with a slur.
1-1 Press the [G] button to select “f.
1-2 Press the [H] button to select “Ten.” (Tenuto).
1-3 Press the [I] button to select the dotted note type.
1-4 Select the dotted quarter-note by using the [6] buttons.
1-5 Play the C3 key.
The first note is entered.
1-6 Press the [I] button to select the “normal” note type.
1-7 Press the [7] button to select the eighth-note length.
1-8 Play the D3 key.
The second note is entered.
2 Enter the next notes and apply staccato.
2-1 Press the [H] button to select “Sta.” (Staccato).
There are two Staccato settings; choose the “40%” setting.
2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length.
2-3 Play the keys E3 and F3 in order.
The first measure has been completed.
3 To enter a quarter-note rest, press the [6] button again.
To enter the rest, use the [4] – [8] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and
once again to actually enter it.) A rest having the specified note length will be entered.
1234
* The numbers shown in the illustration
correspond to the following operation
step numbers.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 53
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
4 Enter the next notes and apply a tie.
4-1 Press the [G] button to select “mP.
4-2 Press the [H] button to select “Nrm.” (Normal).
4-3 While holding G3 key on the keyboard, press the [6] button.
Do not release the G3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps.
4-4 While holding the G3 key, press the C4 key.
Do not release the G3 and C4 keys yet. Keep holding the notes while executing the following step.
4-5 While holding the keys G3 and C4, press the [5] button.
After pressing the button, release the keys.
5 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top
of the Song, then hear the newly entered Song by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display.
7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-
tion.
54 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Recording Chords (Step Recording)
You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time with precise timing.
These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function.
1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons
simultaneously.
A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording.
NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings.
2 Select the Style you want to use in the Song.
3 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [B] SONG CREATOR TAB [ ][ ] CHORD
4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display.
5 Now, go on to the next section and start Step Recording.
For information on these
buttons, refer to page 51.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 55
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Example of Step Recording — Chords
Before starting, make sure the [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to off since no Fill in is included in the
notation example above.
1 Enter the chords for the Main A section.
1-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN A] button.
1-2 Press the [5] button to select the half-note length.
1-3 Play the chord C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard.
2 Enter the chords for the Break section.
2-1 Press the STYLE [BREAK] button.
2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length.
2-3 Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard.
NOTE To enter fill-ins, turn the [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON, and simply press the desired MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] button.
C F G F G7 C
1 2 3
* The numbers shown in the illustration
correspond to the respective operation
step numbers below.
MAIN A BREAK MAIN B
NOTE This example uses a Style in 4/4 time.
C
F
G
1-2
1-3
1-1
F
G7
2-3
2-1
2-2
56 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
3 Enter the chords for the Main B section.
3-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN B] button.
3-2 Press the [4] button to select the whole-note length.
3-3 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard.
4 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top
of the Song, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered Song.
5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display.
6 Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song
data.
7 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-
tion.
3-33-1
C
3-2
CVP-701 Reference Manual 57
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out
When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this
method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly
recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over,
although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in and out of the Punch In/Out timing.
1 Select the Song you want to re-record.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU2 [B] SONG CREATOR TAB [ ][ ] REC MODE
3 Determine the settings for recording.
[1] –
[3]
REC START
(Punch In)
Determines the recording start behavior.
NORMAL
Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG CONTROL
[PLAY/PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro
Standby mode.
FIRST KEY ON
The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon
as you play the keyboard.
PUNCH IN AT
The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated
Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can
set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3] button.
[4] –
[6]
REC END
(Punch Out)
Determines the recording stop behavior, or how data is handled after
recording is stopped.
REPLACE ALL
This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped.
PUNCH OUT
The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the
Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which
recording is stopped.
PUNCH OUT AT
Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the speci-
fied Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at
which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting
maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can
set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6] buttons.
58 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
4 While holding the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the desired track button.
5 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Punch In/Out recording.
Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point.
6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-
tion.
Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings
This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below
indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded.
[7]/
[8]
PEDAL PUNCH
IN/OUT
When this is set to ON, you can use the center pedal to control the
Punch In and Punch Out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing
(and holding) the center pedal instantly enables Punch In recording,
while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out). You can press
and release the center pedal as often as you want during playback to
punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function
assignment of the center pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out
function is set to ON.
NOTE Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you’ve con-
nected to the instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 89).
12345678
12345
12345678
12345678
12345
12345678
12345678
12345
12345678
6 8
12345 7
REC START setting
REC END setting
NORMAL
REPLACE ALL
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT
NORMAL
PUNCH OUT AT 006
FIRST KEY ON
REPLACE ALL
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT
FIRST KEY ON
PUNCH OUT AT 006
PUNCH IN AT 003
REPLACE ALL
PUNCH IN AT 003
PUNCH OUT
PUNCH IN AT 003
PUNCH OUT AT 006
Original data
Start overwrite
recording *1
Start overwrite
recording *1
Start overwrite
recording *1
Play back
original data
Play back
original data
Play back
original data
Play back
original data
Play back
original data
Play back
original data
Play the keyboard to start
overwrite recording
Play the keyboard to start
overwrite recording
Play the keyboard to start
overwrite recording
Start overwrite recording
Start overwrite recording
Start overwrite recording
Stop recording *2
Stop recording *2
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Stop recording *2
Stop recording *2
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Stop recording *2
Stop recording *2
Stop overwrite recording/
play original data
Deleted
Deleted
*1 To avoid overwriting measures 1 –
2, start recording from measure 3.
*2 To stop recording, press the [REC]
button at the end of measure 5.
Previously recorded data
Newly recorded data
Deleted data
Deleted
CVP-701 Reference Manual 59
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song
The current settings of the Mixing Console display and other panel settings can be recorded to the top
position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are
automatically recalled when the Song starts.
1 Select the Song to which you want to record the Setup data.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ]MENU 2 [B] SONG CREATOR TAB[ ][ ] SETUP
3 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to move the Song position to the top of the
Song.
4 Determine the Setup data to be recorded.
[1] –
[4]
SELECT Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically
called up along with the selected Song. The items selected here can be
recorded only to the top position of the Song, except for the
KEYBOARD VOICE.
VOICE, VOLUME, PAN, FILTER, EFFECT, TEMPO, EQ
Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing
Console.
KEYBOARD VOICE
Records the panel settings, including the Voice selection of the keyboard
parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings
recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting.
This can be recorded at any point in a Song.
SCORE SETTING
Records the settings in the Score display.
GUIDE SETTING
Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/
OFF setting.
LYRICS SETTING
Records the settings in the Lyrics display.
MIC SETTING
Records the microphone settings in the MIC SETTING display.
[5]/
[6]
MARK ON/OFF For adding or removing checkmarks to/from the selected item. Checked
items are recorded to the Song.
[7]/
[8]
APPLY For recording the checked item to the top position of the Song.
60 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
5 Press one of the [7]/[8] (APPLY) buttons to record the data.
6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The edited Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without carrying out the Save
operation.
Editing Channel Events
You can apply various useful functions to already recorded data, such as Quantize and Transpose, on the
CHANNEL page.
1 Select a Song to be edited.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [B] SONG CREATOR TAB [ ][ ] CHANNEL
3 In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the
data by using the [1] – [8] buttons.
For details of the edit menu and available settings, see page 61.
4 Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display.
After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if
you are not satisfied with the operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous
operation can be undone.
5 Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps.
For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTICE
The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save opera-
tion.
3
45
3
CVP-701 Reference Manual 61
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
1 QUANTIZE
The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you
record the musical phrase shown below, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your
performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way
to correct for this.
2 DELETE
You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data is to be deleted
by using the [1] – [8] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation.
[2]/
[3]
CHANNEL Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is to be quantized.
[4] –
[6]
SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should
set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For exam-
ple, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use 1/8
note as the Quantize size.
The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally
convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at
the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth
notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the
straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight
eighth notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you
use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and
triplet notes will be quantized correctly.
[7]/
[8]
STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100%
produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will
be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the spec-
ified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you pre-
serve some of the “human” feel in the recording.
After 1/8 note quantization
1/4 note
1/4 note
triplet
1/16 note
1/16 note
triplet
1/32 note
1/8 note+
1/8 note triplet*
1/16 note+
1/8 note triplet*
1/16 note+
1/16 note triplet*
1/8 note
1/8 note
triplet
Settings:
Original data
(assuming 4/4 meter)
Quantizing
strength = 100
Quantizing
strength = 50
Quarter-note length
62 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
3 MIX
This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets
you copy the data from one channel to another.
4 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE
This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two
octaves in semitone increments.
NOTE Make sure not to transpose channels 9 and 10. In general, Drum kits are assigned to these channels. If you transpose the channels of Drum kits, the
instruments assigned to each key will be changed.
[2]/
[3]
SOURCE 1 Determines the MIDI channel (1 16) to be mixed. All MIDI events of
the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel.
[4]/
[5]
SOURCE 2 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. Only note events of
the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. Besides
the values 1 – 16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the
data from Source 1 to the destination channel.
[6]/
[7]
DESTINATION Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed.
[F]
CH 1–8/CH 9–16
Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16.
[G] ALL CH To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel
Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 63
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics
You can edit chord events, note events, System Exclusive events and lyrics in the same manner on the
corresponding display: CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. and LYRICS. These displays are called “Event List display”
because some events are shown in a list view.
NOTE After you edit events in the CHORD tab display, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data.
NOTE Chord section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on the Event List displays.
[A]/[B] Moves the cursor up/down and select the desired event.
[C] Moves the cursor to the top (beginning of the Song).
[D]/[E] Moves the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the high-
lighted event.
[H] FILTER Calls up the Filter display (page 65), letting you select only the events
you wish to be shown in the event list.
[I] SAVE Press to save the edited Song.
[J] MULTI SEL. Holding this button while using the [A]/[B] buttons lets you select multi-
ple events.
[1] BAR Determines the position (bar/beat/clock) of the data. One clock is equal to
1/1920th of a quarter note.
[2]BEAT
[3]CLK
[4]/
[5]
DATA ENTRY Adjusts the event value. For coarse adjustment, use the [4] buttons.
For fine adjustment, use the [5] buttons or [DATA ENTRY] dial.
[6] CUT Executes the cut/copy/delete/paste operation.
[7]COPY
[7] DELETE
[8]PASTE
[6] INS (INSERT) Adds a new event.
[8] CANCEL Cancels editing and restores the original value.
Indicates the event
value.
Indicates the location
(position) of the
corresponding event.
Indicates the event type.
See page 64.
Event List display
64 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Chord Events (CHORD Page)
Note Events (1-16 Page)
System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX. Page)
Style Style
Tempo Tempo
Chord Chord root, Chord type, On Bass Chord
Sect Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending)
OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style
CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style
S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style
Note An individual note within a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds
to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is
played, and the gate time value (the length of a note).
Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth
(edited via the Mixing Console described in chapter 9), etc.
Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice.
P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously.
A.T. (Aftertouch)
This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played.
Note that the keyboard of this instrument does not feature Aftertouch.
ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song.
Tempo Determines the tempo value.
Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature.
Key (Key signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music
score shown on the display.
XGPrm (XG
parameters)
Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. Refer to
the “MIDI Data Format” in the MIDI Reference downloadable from the
Yamaha Manual Library.
SYS/EX. (System
Exclusive)
Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot
create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can
delete, cut, copy, and paste the data.
Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot cre-
ate new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete,
cut, copy, and paste the data.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 65
Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI –
5
Lyrics Events (LYRICS Page)
Name Allows you to enter the Song name.
Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics.
Code CR: Enters a line break in the lyrics text.
LF: Clears the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics.
Displaying Specific Types of Events
In the Event List displays, various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint
the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which
event types will be shown in the Event List displays.
1 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS displays.
2 Checkmark the desired item to be displayed.
3 Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings.
[C] MAIN Displays all main types of events.
[D] CTRL. CHG Displays all specific Control Change message events.
[E] STYLE Displays all types of Style playback related events.
[H] ALL ON Checkmarks all event types.
[I]
NOTE/ALL OFF/
CHORD
“NOTE” or “CHORD” selects only NOTE/CHORD data.
ALL OFF” removes all checkmarks.
[J] INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other
words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previ-
ously unchecked and vice versa.
[2] –
[5]
Selects an event type to be checked or unchecked.
[6]/
[7]
MARK ON Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected event type.
The checked event types can be shown on the CHORD, 1-
16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS Page.
[6]/
[7]
MARK OFF
7
66 CVP-701 Reference Manual
6
USB Audio Player/Recorder
– Playback and Recording Audio Files –
This function is fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in the Owner’s Manual.
Microphone
– Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –
Contents
Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
• Saving the Microphone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
• VOCAL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
• TALK Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
This section lets you set parameters for various Effects that are applied to the microphone sound. You should
make both “Vocal” and “Talk” settings — “Vocal,” for your singing performance, and “Talk,” for making
announcements between songs, for example.
1 Connect the microphone to the instrument, then call up the MIC SETTING display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [F] MIC SETTING
2 Press the [F] button to turn the MIC on.
This lets you talk into the microphone and hear the changes made while setting the parameters.
3 Select the desired page, VOCAL or TALK, by using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons.
MIC ON/OFF
Turns the microphone sound on or off.
TALK ON/OFF
Switches the microphone setup between the Vocal setup (for singing and normal performance) and Talk
setup (for making announcements or talking between songs). When set to ON, only the Talk settings are
active. When set to OFF, only the Vocal settings are active.
Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)
VOCAL
page
TAL K
page
Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –
CVP-701 Reference Manual 67
Microphone Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –
7
4 Use the [A] – [E] buttons to select the specific row (or group) of parameters to be
adjusted.
5 Set the value of specific parameters in the row by using the [1] – [6] buttons.
For information on each parameter, see page 6768.
NOTICE
After setting, go to the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button and save the settings (see below
section). The settings will be lost if you exit from this display or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save
operation.
Saving the Microphone Settings
All the settings (VOCAL/TALK pages) are saved together as a single file. Up to ten files can be saved. For
ease in future recall, you should assign a sufficiently descriptive name to the file or one that matches your
performance.
1 On the MIC SETTING display (in step 3 above), press the [H] (USER MEMORY) button.
2 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the file to USER.
For details on the naming and deleting procedures, refer to the “Renaming a File/Folder” and “Deleting
Files/Folders” sections in the Owner’s Manual.
NOTE The microphone setting file can be saved only to the internal USER drive. If you want to save this setting to the USB flash drive, save the User Effect file
on the display called up via [FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [G] SYSTEM TAB [ ][ ] SETUP FILES [H] (USER EFFECT FILES)
TAB [ ][ ] USB [6] (SAVE).
VOCAL Page
3-BAND EQ (selected by [A]/[B] buttons)
EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be
boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. This instrument features a high-grade
three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound.
To get the most convenient use of this Talk function, use the [1] button to assign one of the pedals
(Left, Center, or AUX) to “TALK” in the following display: [DIRECT ACCESS] press one of the
pedals (Left, Center, or AUX)
This allows you to use one of the pedals to switch the Talk function on and off during your performance,
without having to call up the menu above.
Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER
1 Call up the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button on the
MIC SETTING display.
2 Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired setting file.
[1]/
[3]/
[5]
Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band.
[2]/
[4]/
[6]
dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB.
68 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance –
7
NOISE GATE (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)
This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This
effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass.
COMPRESSOR (selected by [C]/[D] buttons)
This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level.
This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively
“compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. For a maximum compression
effect, set RATIO to a high setting and adjust the OUT parameter for optimum volume.
TALK Page
The settings here are for your speech or announcements (NOT your singing performance), and are active when
the TALK (page 66) is set to ON. All indications and parameters (with the exception of TALK MIXING
below) are the same as in the VOCAL page. However, the settings are independent from those in the VOCAL
page.
TALK MIXING (selected by [E] button)
[1] SW (Switch) Turns the Noise Gate on or off.
[2] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open.
[3] SW (Switch) Turns the Compressor on or off.
[4] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level above which the Compressor is applied.
[5] RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed
sound, with a reduced dynamic range.
[6] OUT Adjusts the final output level.
[1] VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound.
[2] PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound.
[3] REVERB
DEPTH
Determines the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone
sound.
[4] CHORUS
DEPTH
Determines the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone
sound.
[5]/
[6]
REDUCTION
LEVEL
Determines the amount of reduction to be applied to the overall sound
(excepting the microphone input) — allowing you to effectively adjust
the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound.
8
Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –
CVP-701 Reference Manual 69
Music Finder
– Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –
Contents
Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
• Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating a Set of Favorite Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Saving the Record as a Single File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
• Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
By registering a Song, Audio or Style file in various locations (Preset, User and USB) into Music Finder, you
can conveniently and easily call up the file from the Song title.
NOTE If you want to register files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal.
1 On the corresponding File Selection display, select a Song, Audio or Style File to be
registered to the Music Finder.
2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as
necessary.
3 Press the [5] (ADD TO MF) button to register the selected file to Music Finder.
The display automatically changes to the Music Finder Record Edit display.
4 Press [8] (OK) button to start the registration.
Press the [8] (CANCEL) button to cancel the registration.
Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE)
70 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –
8
5 Confirm that the registered file name is shown in the MUSIC column while (SONG),
(AUDIO) or the Style name is shown in the STYLE column.
Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder
You can recall the registered Song, Audio or Style data in the same way as done in the “Selecting Desired
Panel Settings from the Records” and “Searching for the Panel Settings” in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 8.
NOTE If you want to play back files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand.
To play back the registered files
To play back a recalled Song file, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button after selecting the
SONG record.
To play back a recalled Audio file, press the [J] (AUDIO) button in the MUSIC FINDER display after
selecting the AUDIO record.
To play back a recalled Style file, select the Style record then follow the same procedure as in Style
playback described in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 3.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 71
Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –
8
As convenient as the Search function is in exploring the depths of the Music Finder records, you may want to
create a custom “folder” of your favorite records — so you can quickly call up the panel settings and song
data you use frequently.
1 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select
the desired record.
2 Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE
display, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually add the record.
3 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons, and check to see if
the record has been added.
Creating a Set of Favorite Records
Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display
1 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display.
2 Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually
delete the record.
3
2
72 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –
8
You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly created records are automati-
cally saved in the internal memory.
1 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select
the desired record to be edited.
2 Press the [8] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display.
3 Edit the record as desired.
Editing Records
[A] MUSIC Edits the song name. Pressing the [A] button calls up the pop-up window
for entering the song name.
[B] KEYWORD
Edits the keyword. Pressing the [B] button calls up the pop-up window to enter
the keyword.
[C] STYLE/SONG/
AUDIO
Changes the Style in case of STYLE record (panel settings). Pressing the
[C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After selecting the desired
Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Edit display.
For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited.
[D] BEAT Changes the beat (time signature) of the record for search purposes.
For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited.
NOTE Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does
not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself.
[E] FAVORITE
Selects whether the edited record is entered to the FAVORITE display or not.
[1]TEMPO
Changes the Tempo. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed.
[2] SECTION Selects the section that will automatically be called up set when the
record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a
selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. For
SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed.
[4]
[5]/
[6]
GENRE Selects the desired genre.
[7] GENRE NAME Creates a new genre.
[I]
DELETE RECORD
Deletes the currently selected record.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 73
Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song –
8
4 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below.
Creating a new record
Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If you’ve entered the
record to the FAVORITE display in step 3, the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE
display.
Overwriting an existing record
Press the [8] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 3, the record is added to the
FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten.
To cancel and quit the Edit operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button.
The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a
single file. Keep in mind that individual records (panel settings and song data) cannot be handled as separate
files.
1 Call up the Save display.
[MUSIC FINDER] [7] FILES
2 Press the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to select the location for saving (USER or USB).
3 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the current file.
All records are saved together as a single file.
Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB
1 Call up the File Selection display.
[MUSIC FINDER] [7] FILES
2 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to select USER or USB.
3 Press the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file.
When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired
button.
Saving the Record as a Single File
[F] REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and
replaced with the records of the selected file.
NOTICE
Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal mem-
ory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand.
[G] APPEND The records called up are added to the record currently in the instrument.
[H] CANCEL Selecting this button aborts the operation (the selected file is not called
up).
74 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –
9
Registration Memory
– Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –
Contents
Deleting or Renaming the Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Confirming the Registration Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
• Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
• Saving the Registration Sequence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the
REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the Registration Memory bank
which contains the Registration you want to delete or rename.
NOTE No Registration banks will be shown in this display unless you have saved one or more beforehand.
2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as
necessary.
3 Press the [7] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT display.
Registrations in the selected bank will be displayed.
Deleting or Renaming the Registration
1
23
CVP-701 Reference Manual 75
Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –
9
4 To delete the Registration, press the [5] (DELETE) button; to rename it, press the
[1] (NAME) button.
5 Select a Registration you want to delete or rename by pressing one of the [A] – [D]
and [F] – [I] buttons.
The subsequent procedures are basically the same as those of renaming or deleting files described in the
Owner’s Manual.
You can call up the information display to take a look which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8]
buttons of a Registration Memory Bank.
1 Simultaneously press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons to call up the Registration
Bank Selection display, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Bank.
NOTE You can instantly call up the information display of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and one
of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons in sequence.
2 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as
necessary.
3 Press the [6] (INFO) button to call up the information display.
By using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons, you can switch between the two information display pages:
information for the Registration Memory [1] – [4] buttons and information for the [5] – [8] buttons.
4 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the information display.
NOTE If certain Voice parts are set to off, the Voice part names for the corresponding parts are shown in gray.
Confirming the Registration Memory Information
5
32
4
76 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –
9
Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there
may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory
setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same
accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of
certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE TAB [ ][ ]
FREEZE
2 Determine the items to be “frozen.
Select the desired item by using the [1] – [3] buttons, then enter or remove the checkmark by
using the [4]/[5] (MARK ON)/[4]/[5] (MARK OFF) buttons.
3 Press the [F] (REGISTRATION FREEZE) button to turn the Freeze function on.
4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.
As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you
want to quickly switch between settings — without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The
convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by
simply using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons or the pedal as you play.
1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the
REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the desired Registration Memory
bank to program a sequence.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE TAB [ ][ ]
REGISTRATION SEQUENCE
Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze)
Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence)
3
CVP-701 Reference Manual 77
Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –
9
3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, specify here how
the pedal will be used — to advance or to reverse through the sequence.
Use the [C] (REGIST+ PEDAL) button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence.
Use the [D] (REGIST- PEDAL) button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence.
NOTE If you assign the function to a pedal here, the other function set in the PEDAL display (page 88) becomes invalid.
4 Use the [E] (SEQUENCE END) button to determine how Registration Sequence
behaves when reaching the end of the sequence.
•STOP Pressing the TAB [ ] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is
“stopped.
•TOP The sequence starts again at the beginning.
•NEXT BANKThe sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory
Bank in the same folder.
5 Program the Sequence order, from left to right.
Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons on the panel, then press the [6]
(INSERT) button to input the number.
6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on.
7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display.
NOTE If you do not close the setting display and it remains open, you cannot call up the Registration Sequence even when you press the pedal.
[1] –
[4]
CURSOR Moves the cursor.
[5] REPLACE Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Regis-
tration Memory number.
[6] INSERT Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory number
before the cursor position.
[7] DELETE Deletes the number at the cursor position.
[8] CLEAR Deletes all numbers in the sequence.
3
6
4
Indicates the name of the
currently selected
Registration Memory Bank.
Indicates the Registration Memory numbers,
in the order of the current Registration
Sequence.
78 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups –
9
Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display
In the Main display, you can confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to
the sequence programmed on pages 76 – 77.
To shift the Registration Memory numbers, use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons when the Main display is shown.
When pedal operation has been set in step 3 on page 77, you can also use a pedal to select the Registration
Memory numbers in order.
Pressing the TAB [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously when the Main display is shown cancels the currently
selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by
pressing one of the TAB [ ][ ] buttons or by pressing the pedal.
NOTE The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3 on page 77).
Saving the Registration Sequence Settings
The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the
sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your
newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file.
NOTICE
Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Regis-
tration Memory Bank file.
1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the
REGISTRATION BANK Selection display.
2 Call up MENU2 at the bottom right of the display by pressing the [8] button as
necessary.
3 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file.
The Registration Sequence is indicated at
the top right of the Main display, letting you
confirm the currently selected number.
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
CVP-701 Reference Manual 79
Mixing Console
– Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
Contents
Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
• Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
• Changing the Voice for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Editing FILTER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Editing TUNE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Editing EFFECT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
• Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
• Creating an Original Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Editing EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Selecting the Master EQ Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Editing Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
• Saving Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
The MIXING CONSOLE display called up via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button consists of several pages of
parameters. Use the TAB [ ]/[ ] buttons to call up the desired page, and set various parameters for each
part to adjust the balance between parts and create your desired sound. Note that the Save operation for your
settings will differ depending on the part. For instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part
1 Press the [D] (or [I]) button to select the PANPOT parameter or press the [E] (or [J])
button to select the VOLUME parameter.
2 Use the [1] – [8] buttons to adjust panning/volume for the desired part.
NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button.
3 Save your settings.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10.
Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters
PANPOT
VOLUME
80 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
Changing the Voice for Each Part
You can change the Voice for each keyboard part, Style channel or Song channel.
1 Press the [C] (or [H]) button to select the VOICE parameter.
2 Press one of the [1] – [8] buttons to select the desired part.
The Voice Selection display appears.
3 Select a Voice.
Press one of the Voice category selection buttons on the panel, then select a Voice by using the [A] – [J]
buttons.
NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1- 8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button.
NOTE Some Voices (such as Organ Flutes) cannot be selected for Style channels.
NOTE Only Drum kit Voices and SFX kit Voices can be assigned to the RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display.
NOTE When playing GM Song data, channel 10 can only be used for a Drum kit Voice.
4 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIXING CONSOLE display.
5 Save your settings.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10.
2
1
CVP-701 Reference Manual 81
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
Editing FILTER Parameters
[A] PART
This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected
for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and
SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual.
[D]/[I] HARMONIC
CONTENT
Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 14) for each part.
[E]/[J] BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cut-
off frequency (page 14).
Editing TUNE Parameters
[A]/[B]/
[F]/[G]
PORTAMENTO
TIME
Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the
first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time deter-
mines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch
change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is
available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono.
[C]/[H] PITCH BEND
RANGE
Determines the range of the PITCH BEND for each keyboard part (when
a pedal is assigned to this function; page 88). The range is from “0” to
“12” with each step corresponding to one semitone.
[D]/[I] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up
or down for each keyboard part.
[E]/[J] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part.
[1] –
[3]
TRANSPOSE Allows you to set transposition for overall sound of the instrument
(MASTER), Song playback (SONG), or the keyboard pitch (KBD),
respectively.
82 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
This instrument has an effect system featuring six separate blocks (Reverb, Chorus and DSP1-4). For each
block, you can assign the desired effect type individually. The effects are applied independently for each part
or globally for the entire sound according to the blocks: the effects of Reverb and Chorus blocks are applied
to all of the parts input to the Mixing Console, DSP1 is applied only to the Style and Song sounds (or applied
to a specific part of the Style or Song depending on the setting), and DSP2-4 are applied to the specific
keyboard parts and Song parts. Use these instructions to set up various effects for blocks and parts to enhance
the sound as desired.
Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block
NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button.
1 Press the [F] (TYPE) button in the EFFECT Page of the Mixing Console display.
The Effect Type Selection display is called up.
2 Use the [1]/[2] buttons to select the effect BLOCK.
Editing EFFECT Parameters
Effect
Block
Applicable parts Effect characteristics
REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz
club.
CHORUS All parts Produces a rich, “fat” sound as if several identical instruments are being
played simultaneously. In addition, other type effects (such as reverb,
delay, etc.) can also be selected in this effect block.
DSP1 STYLE PART,
SONG
CHANNEL 1-16
This effect is applied only to Style/Song parts. When the “Connection”
parameter selected in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” section
(on page 83) is set to “System,” the DSP1 effect will be applied overall
to the Style and Song. When it is set to “Insertion,” the DSP1 effect will
be applied to a specific part of the Style or Song.
DSP2-4 RIGHT 1,
RIGHT 2, LEFT,
SONG
CHANNEL 1-16
For each of DSP2-4, you can select one of the parts or channels listed at
left. When you select “RIGHT2” for DSP2, for example, the DSP2
Effect is applied only to the Right 2 part. Note that if you select a Song
or Style which requires the DSP2-4 Blocks, the part assignment of
these three Blocks will be changed automatically with last priority
according to the data.
2 3 4 5
CVP-701 Reference Manual 83
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
3 Use the [3]/[4] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect.
Note that a part cannot be selected if “REVERB” or “CHORUS” is selected, or if the CONNECTION
parameter of “DSP1” is set to “System” (in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” below). This is because
only one of the Effect Types can be selected to be commonly applied to all available Parts.
4 Use the [5]/[6] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY.
5 Use the [7]/[8] buttons to select the effect TYPE.
If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation.
Creating an Original Effect
1 Once you’ve selected an Effect Block and Effect Type above, press the [F] button to
call up the display for editing the effect parameters.
2 Select the desired parameter for editing by using the [2] – [4] buttons, then
adjust the value by using the [5]/[6] buttons.
If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block, you can adjust the Effect Return Level
by pressing [7] button.
NOTE Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument.
3 If DSP 2 – 4 is selected as the Effect Block, edit the Variation parameter if desired.
Press the [7] (VARI. DETAIL) button to call up the Variation parameter, select a parameter via the
[2] – [4] buttons, and then use the [5]/[6] buttons to edit the value. This parameter is
effective only when the DSP VARIATION in the VOICE EFFECT display is set to on. To close the
Variation parameter display, press the [EXIT] button.
4
2
84 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your original effect.
5 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect.
The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block.
6 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect.
In the Naming window called up via this operation, assign the name to the User Effect Type then press the
[8] (OK) button to save the User Effect Type. If you want to call up the User Effect Type saved here, use
the same procedure as in steps 4 – 5 of “Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block.
Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands
that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to
correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of
the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high
frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes.
Editing EQ Parameters
[A] PART This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected
for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and
SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual.
[D]/[I] EQ HIGH Boosts or attenuates the high EQ band for each part.
[E]/[J] EQ LOW Boosts or attenuates the low EQ band for each part.
4,
6
5
CVP-701 Reference Manual 85
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
The instrument possesses a high-quality five-band digital EQ. With this function, a final effect — tone
control — can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in
the MEQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and
save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types.
1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master EQ type.
•FLAT: Flat EQ settings. The gain of each frequency is set to 0dB.
•LOW CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the low frequencies, making the sound clearer.
LOW BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the low frequencies, making the sound more powerful.
HIGH CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the high frequencies, making the sound more mellow.
HIGH BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the high frequencies, making the sound brighter.
•USER1/2: Your own custom EQ settings saved in step 4.
The set parameters of the selected Master EQ type are automatically shown at the bottom of the display.
2 Use the [E]/[J] buttons to move the cursor to the GAIN row, then use the [1] –
[5] buttons to adjust the GAIN level to boost or cut each of the five bands.
To boost or cut all the five bands at the same time, use the [6]/[7] buttons.
3 Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in
step 2.
To adjust the bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”), use the [C]/[H] buttons to move the cursor to the Q
row, then use the [2] – [4] buttons. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width.
To adjust the FREQ (center frequency), use the [D]/[I] buttons to move the cursor to the FREQ row, then
use the [1] – [5] buttons. The available FREQ range is different for each band.
4 Press the [F] or [G] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited Master EQ type.
In the Naming display called up via this operation, assign the name then press the [8] (OK) button to
store your settings as a User Master EQ Type, which can be called up via the [A]/[B] buttons.
Selecting the Master EQ Type
0
Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”)
Gain
Freq
(Frequency)
5 bands
LOW
EQ1
LOWMID
EQ2
MID
EQ3
HIGHMID
EQ4
HIGH
EQ5
1
4
3
2, 3
86 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (softness/loudness) of an audio
signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as vocals and guitar parts, it “squeezes” the dynamic
range, effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall
level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound.
This instrument features a Master Compressor which is applied to the entire sound of this instrument.
Although preset Master Compressor settings are provided, you can also create and save your original Master
Compressor by adjusting the related parameters.
NOTE Master Compressor cannot be applied to an audio file or the Metronome sound.
Editing Master Compressor Settings
[F] ON/OFF Turns the Master Compressor effect on or off.
[1]/
[2]
TYPE Selects a Master Compressor type.
[3]/
[4]
THRESHOLD
OFFSET
Determines the threshold (minimum level at which compression starts).
[5]/
[6]
RATIO OFFSET Determines the ratio of compression (how much the dynamic range is
compressed).
[7]/
[8]
OUTPUT GAIN
OFFSET
Determines the output level.
The indication “GAIN REDUCTION”
shows the Gain Reduction
(compressed level) while “OUTPUT”
shows the output level according to
the instrument sound in real time.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 87
Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance –
10
Saving Master Compressor Settings
The Master Compressor settings you have edited on page 86 can be saved as a User Compressor type.
1 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to enter the USER MASTER COMPRESSOR display.
2 Select the destination to which the User Master Compressor is to be saved, by using
the [3] – [6] buttons.
3 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to open the SAVE display.
4 Enter the name of the edited Compressor type, then press the [8] (OK) button to
actually save the settings.
5 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display.
The saved Compressor type is shown in the TYPE selection at the bottom left of the display and can be
selected in the same way as the preset types.
2
31
88 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
Connections
– Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
Contents
Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
• Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Wireless LAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
• Infrastructure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
• Ad Hoc Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
• MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
• MIDI Transmit Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
• MIDI Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
• Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
• Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal
In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right,
Center and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various functions here. The following explanations cover the
related operations and assignable functions (parameters).
NOTE For information on how to connect a Footswitch or Foot Controller, refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [D] CONTROLLER TAB [ ][ ] PEDAL
2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal,
to which the function is to be assigned.
Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings
3
2
5
6
4
CVP-701 Reference Manual 89
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
3 Use the [1] buttons to select the function to be assigned to the pedal specified in
step 2.
For information on available parameters, see pages 89 – 91.
NOTE You can also assign other functions to the pedal — Punch in/out of Song (page 57) and Registration Sequence (page 76). If you assign multiple func-
tions to the pedal, the priority is: Punch in/out of Song Registration Sequence functions assigned here.
4 Use the [2] – [8] buttons to set the details of the selected functions (the part
for which the function is applied, etc.).
The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3.
5 When you have selected the left or center pedal in step 2, press the [H] (SWITCH WITH
R1 VOICE) button to turn this parameter OFF.
This setting locks the pedal function so that it does not change automatically when you change the Right 1
Voice.
6 If necessary, set the polarity of the pedal by using the [I] button.
Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument.
For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different
make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation.
Assignable Pedal Functions
For functions indicated with “*”, use only the foot controller; proper operation cannot be done with a
footswitch.
ARTICULATION When you use a Super Articulation Voice that has an effect assigned to the
pedal/footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch.
You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display.
VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is
available only for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack.
SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the
pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the
pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. If you are using the right
pedal or connected foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter
allows you to specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the
damper effect starts working.
SOSTENUTO Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or
chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes
will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not
sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other
notes are played staccato.
NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if
this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals.
SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces
the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only
for certain appropriate Voices. You can turn this pedal function on or off for
each keyboard part on this display. If you are using the right pedal or connected
foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter allows you to specify
how far down you should press on the pedal until the soft effect starts working.
90 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch
when the pedal is released. The following parameters can be set for this func-
tion on this display.
UP/DOWN
Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).
RANGE
Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.
ON SPEED
Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed.
OFF SPEED
Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released.
LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2
Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part.
PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while
the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style
(i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento
time can also be adjusted form the Mixing Console display (page 81). This
function does not affect certain Natural Voices, which would not sound appro-
priately with this function.
NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes, Super Articulation Voices and only some of the Super
Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals.
PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. This
function can be assigned to the right pedal or connected foot controller. The
following parameters can be set for this function on this display.
UP/DOWN
Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered).
RANGE
Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones.
LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2
Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part.
MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various
effects can be added to the Super Articulation Voice. The effect becomes
deeper when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this pedal func-
tion on or off for each keyboard part on this display.
MODULATION
(ALT)
This is a slight variation on MODULATION above, in which the effects (wave-
form) can be switched on/off by each press of the pedal/footswitch. The modu-
lation effect is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal/footswitch is
pressed. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this dis-
play.
DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off.
VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE
effect type is selected.
KEYBOARD
HARMONY
Switches the Harmony or Echo effect on and off.
TALK Switches the microphone setup settings between Vocal and Talk.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 91
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
SCORE PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous score page (one
page at a time).
LYRICS PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous lyrics page (one
page at a time).
SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button.
STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button.
TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button.
SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button.
SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button.
INTRO 1–3 Same as the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons.
MAIN A–D Same as the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons.
FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the but-
ton on the immediate left.
FILL SELF Plays a fill-in.
FILL BREAK Plays a break.
FILL UP Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the but-
ton on the immediate right.
ENDING1–3 Same as the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons.
FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In /Fade Out function on and off.
FINGERD/FING ON
BASS
The pedal alternately switches the Chord Fingering types between the Fingered
and Fingering On Bass.
BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held
even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to AI
FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work.
PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4] – [8]
buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument.
NOTE When you select the percussion instrument by pressing a key on the keyboard, the velocity with which you
press the key determines the percussion volume.
RIGHT 1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button.
RIGHT 2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button.
LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button.
OTS +/- Calls up the next/previous One Touch Setting.
92 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
By using a USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold separately), you can connect this instrument with an
iPhone/iPad via a wireless network. For general operating instructions, refer to the iPhone/iPad Connection
Manual. This section covers only operations that are specific to this instrument.
Before starting operations, make sure that the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO
DEVICE] terminal and call up the setup display via [FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU 2
[H] WIRELESS LAN.
NOTE If the USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument, “WIRELESS LAN” for the [H] button is not shown. When “WIRELESS LAN” is not shown
even though a USB wireless LAN adaptor has been connected, turn the instrument off then on again.
Infrastructure Mode
Wireless LAN Settings
[A]/[B] Selects the network.
[G] UPDATE Updates the network list on the display.
[I] DETAIL Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the
[7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them.
IP ADDRESS:
Sets the IP address and other related parameters.
OTHERS:
When the instrument is connected to the network with the Infrastructure
Mode, the current time is shown on the Main display.
You can set the Time Zone via the [B] button and Daylight Saving Time
via the [C] button for your local time.
[1]/
[2]
WPS Connects this instrument to the network via WPS. After pressing this but-
ton, press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes.
NOTE Make sure that your access point supports WPS. About the confirmation and changes in the access
point settings, refer to the manual of the access point.
[3]/
[4]
MODE
CHANGE
Switches to the Ad Hoc Mode.
[5]/
[6]
INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 93
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
Ad Hoc Mode
[7]/
[8]
CONNECT Connects to the selected network.
If you select “Other” by using the [A]/[B] buttons, this calls up the Man-
ual Setup display in which you set the SSID, security method, and pass-
word. After entering those, press one of the [7]/[8] buttons in
the Manual Setup display to connect to the network.
[I] DETAIL Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the
[7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them.
WIRELESS NETWORK:
Sets the SSID, security, password, and channel.
IP ADDRESS:
Sets the IP address and other related parameters.
OTHERS:
Enters the Host name or shows MAC address, etc.
[3]/
[4]
MODE
CHANGE
Switches to the Infrastructure Mode.
[5]/
[6]
INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status.
94 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. This instrument gives you a set of ten
pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your
particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up
to ten of your original templates to the USER display.
NOTE You can save all your original templates as a single file to USB flash drive: [FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [G] SYSTEM TAB [ ][ ]
SETUP FILES [G] MIDI SETUP FILES. See page 106.
1 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [I] MIDI
2 Select a pre-programmed template from the PRESET Page (page 95).
If you have already created an original template and saved it to the USER Page, you can also select that
template from the USER Page.
3 Press the [8] (EDIT) button to call up the MIDI display to edit the selected template.
4 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to call up the relevant setting display.
•SYSTEM MIDI System Settings (page 96)
TRANSMIT MIDI Transmission Settings (page 97)
RECEIVE MIDI Reception Settings (page 98)
•BASS Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99)
CHORD DETECT Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99)
5 When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template
Selection display.
6 Select the USER tab display by using the TAB [ ][ ] buttons, then press the [6]
(SAVE) button to save the edited template.
MIDI Settings
63
2
CVP-701 Reference Manual 95
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
Pre-programmed MIDI Templates
All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT), with
the exception of Song parts.
KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “ALL PARTS” with the exception of how keyboard parts
are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT
1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.
Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and
controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a
computer/sequencer).
Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used
to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an
external sequencer.
Clock Ext Playback or recording (Song, Style, etc.) synchronizes with an external MIDI
clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used
when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instru-
ment.
MIDI Accord1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone
generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This
template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback
on the instrument with the left-hand buttons.
MIDI Accord2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the
chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on a MIDI Accordion are recog-
nized also as MIDI note events.
MIDI Pedal1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet
(especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets
you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit.
MIDI Pedal2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI
pedal unit.
MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received.
96 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
MIDI Settings
The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM Page in step 4 on page 94.
Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameters (below), then set the ON/OFF status by using the [1] –
[8] buttons.
1 Local Control
Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the
instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal Voices to be played
directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally
disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the
keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play
the instrument’s internal Voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer
and/or play an external tone generator.
2 Clock setting, etc.
CLOCK
Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received
from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone
or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external
sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this
parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external
device is connected properly (e.g., to the instruments MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly
transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB
2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display.
NOTE If the Clock is set to something other than INTERNAL, the Style or Song cannot be played from the panel buttons.
NOTE When a USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, the “WIRELESS LAN” parameter can also be selected.
TRANSMIT CLOCK
Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is
transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back.
RECEIVE TRANSPOSE
Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose setting is applied to the note events received by the
instrument via MIDI.
START/STOP
Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback.
3 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch)
SYS/EX.
The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting
turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external
equipment on or off.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 97
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
CHORD SYS/EX.
The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Chord System Exclusive data (chord detect, root and
type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data
generated by external equipment on or off.
MIDI Transmit Settings
The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will
be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent.
1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the part for changing
transmit settings.
With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already
explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual.
UPPER
A keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT 1
and/or 2).
LOWER
A keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not
affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button.
2 Use the [3] buttons to select a channel via which the selected part will be
transmitted.
NOTE If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel — resulting in unex-
pected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device.
NOTE Protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1-16 are set to be transmitted.
3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be sent.
The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display.
NOTE (Note events) .........page 64
CONTROL CHANGE ......page 64
PROGRAM CHANGE .....page 64
PITCH BEND ...................page 64
AFTER TOUCH................page 64
231
1
The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16)
flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on
the channel(s).
NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle
MIDI messages received via the USB wireless
LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although
the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn
the instrument off then on again.
98 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
MIDI Receive Settings
The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will
receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received.
1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the channel to be received.
The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection.
2 Use the [3] buttons to select the part via which the selected channel will be
received.
With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already
explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual.
KEYBOARD
The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance.
EXTRA PART 1–5
There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not
used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by
using these five parts in addition to the parts.
3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be received.
MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals
The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for
transmitting/receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows:
231
1
The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16)
flash briefly whenever any data is received on the
channel(s).
NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle
MIDI messages received via the USB wireless
LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE]
terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although
the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn
the instrument off then on again.
MIDI reception MIDI transmission
[MIDI IN] jack [USB TO HOST] jack [MIDI OUT] jack [USB TO HOST] jack
Port handling
USB2USB1
Merge
MIDI/USB1/
WLAN 01–16
USB2
0116
MIDI/USB/WLAN 01–16
Wireless
LAN
Wireless LAN
CVP-701 Reference Manual 99
Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –
11
Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive
The explanations here apply to the BASS Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you determine the bass
note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at
the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass notes of the chords of Style playback. The bass note
will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. When several channels are
simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels
.
1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the channel.
2 Use the [1] – [8] buttons to set the desired channel to ON or OFF.
You can also set all channels to OFF by pressing the [I] (ALL OFF) button.
Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive
The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you
determine the chord type for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off
messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style
playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord types will be detected
regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or Split Point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to
“ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels.
The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above.
1
2
100 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
Utility / System
– Making Global Settings –
Contents
CONFIG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CONFIG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
PARA METER LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
BACKUP/RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
SETUP FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [J] UTILITY TAB [ ][ ] CONFIG1
1 Fade In/Out
These parameters determine the behavior when the Style or Song playback is faded in/out.
CONFIG1
[3] FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from mini-
mum to maximum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds).
[4]FADE OUT
TIME
Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maxi-
mum to minimum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds).
[5]FADE OUT
HOLD TIME
Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range
of 0 – 5.0 seconds).
Select the desired parameter:
1 Fade In/Out
2 Metronome
3 Tap Percussion
4 AUTO POWER OFF
5 LCD BRIGHTNESS
CVP-701 Reference Manual 101
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
2 Metronome
3 Tap Percussion
This allows you to set the drum sound and the velocity which will sound when the Tap function is used.
4 AUTO POWER OFF
5 LCD BRIGHTNESS
Refer to the Owner’s Manual.
[2] VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound.
[3] –
[5]
SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome.
BELL OFF..................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell
accent.
BELL ON ...................Conventional metronome sound, with bell
accent.
ENGLISH VOICE ......Count in English
GERMAN VOICE......Count in German
JAPANESE VOICE ....Count in Japanese
FRENCH VOICE .......Count in French
SPANISH VOICE.......Count in Spanish
[6]/
[7]
TIME
SIGNATURE
Determines the time signature of the metronome sound.
[2] –
[4]
PERCUSSION Selects the instrument.
[5]/
[6]
VELOCITY Sets the velocity.
[4]/
[5]
AUTO POWER
OFF
Determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automat-
ically turned off. The setting range is DISABLED/5/10/15/30/60/120
(minutes).
102 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [J] UTILITY TAB [ ][ ] CONFIG2
1 Speaker-related settings
CONFIG2
[1]/
[2]
SPEAKER Determines whether or not the speaker will sound.
HEADPHONE SW
Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted
to the PHONES jack.
ON:
Speaker sound is always on.
OFF:
Speaker sound is off. You can only hear the instrument sound via the
headphones.
[3]/
[4]
STEREOPHONIC
OPTIMIZER
Turns the Stereophonic Optimizer on or off.
•On......This function is effective on the VRM Voices sounded from
the headphone(s) connected to the [PHONE] jack(s).
NOTE In case the “Speaker” setting above is “On” and headphone(s) are connected to
the [PHONES] jack(s), this function is effective on the VRM Voices from the
headphone(s) as well as from the speakers of the instrument.
NOTE In case the headphone(s) are connected to the [PHONES] jack(s) and external
audio devices are connected to the AUX OUT[L/L+R]/[R] jacks, this function is
effective on the VRM Voices from the headphone(s) as well as from the audio
devices.
•Off.....The effect of Stereophonic Optimizer is not applied.
[5]/
[6]
AUX IN NOISE
GATE
This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the AUX IN
falls below a specified level.
[7] I.A. CONTROL
ON/OFF
I.A. Control (Intelligent Acoustic Control) is a function which auto-
matically adjusts and controls the sound quality according to the over-
all volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is low, it permits
both low sounds and high sounds to be clearly heard. I.A. Control is
effective only from the sound output of the instrument speakers.
[8] I.A. CONTROL
DEPTH
This sets the depth of the I.A. Control. The higher the value, the more
clearly that low and high sounds are heard at lower volume levels.
Select the desired parameter:
1 Speaker
2 Voice Category Button
Options/Display-related Set-
tings
CVP-701 Reference Manual 103
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
2 Voice Category Button Options/Display-related settings
[1] STYLE TEMPO Selects whether the default tempo of each Style is displayed above the
Style name or not in the Style Selection display.
[2]VOICE
NUMBER
Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the
Voice Selection display. This is useful when you want to check which
bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to
specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device.
NOTE The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers
are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.”
NOTE For the GS Voices, the Display Voice Number is not available (the program change numbers are not
shown).
[3] TIME STAMP Determines whether the time stamp of a file is shown on the USER/USB
tabs of the File Selection display or not.
NOTE When the instrument is connected to a network via the USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01), the
current time is taken from the network and displayed.
[5]/
[6]
VOICE
CATEGORY
BUTTON
OPTIONS
Determines how the Voice Selection display is opened when one of the
VOICE buttons is pressed.
OPEN & SELECT
Opens the Voice Selection display with the previously selected Voice in
the Voice category automatically selected (when one of the VOICE but-
tons is pressed).
OPEN ONLY
Opens the Voice Selection display with the currently selected Voice
(when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed).
[7]/
[8]
POPUP
DISPLAY TIME
Determines the time which elapses before the pop-up windows close.
(Pop-up windows are displayed when you press buttons such as TEMPO,
TRANSPOSE, etc.)
104 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [J] UTILITY TAB [ ][ ] PARAMETER LOCK
This function is used to “lock” specific parameters (effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via
the panel control — in other words, instead of being changed via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting,
Music Finder, or Song and sequence data. Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the desired parameter,
then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [7]/[8] (mark on) and [7]/[8] (mark off) buttons.
You can set or execute important USB media-related operations for the instrument.
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU1 [J] UTILITY TAB [ ][ ] USB
PARAMETER LOCK
USB
[A]/[B] DRIVE LIST Selects the desired USB flash drive for checking the remaining memory
of (see “PROPERTY” below) or for formatting (see the Owner’s Man-
ual).
[F] PROPERTY Opens the Property display of the USB flash drive selected by [A]/[B]
buttons, from which you can check the amount of remaining memory.
NOTE The displayed remaining memory value is an approximate value.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 105
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU2 [G] SYSTEM TAB [ ][ ] OWNER
Refer to the Owner’s Manual.
[H] FORMAT Formats the USB flash drive selected by [A]/[B] buttons. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual, chapter 11.
[3]/
[4]
SONG AUTO
OPEN
Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON”
and the USB flash drive selected in the Drive List above is inserted, the
instrument automatically calls up the first MIDI Song in the USB flash
drive.
OWNER
[I] OWNER NAME Allows you to enter your name as the owner. The Owner name is indi-
cated on the opening display when you turn the power on. Refer to the
Owner’s Manual.
[4]/
[5]
LANGUAGE Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change
this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language.
[7]/
[8]
VERSION Displays the version number of this instrument.
BACKUP/RESTORE
106 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall.
1 Make all desired settings on the instrument.
2 Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TAB [ ][ ] MENU2 [G] SYSTEM TAB [ ][ ] SETUP FILES
3 Press one of the [F] – [I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data.
4 Use the TAB [ ][ ] buttons to select one of the tabs (other than PRESET) to which
your settings will be saved.
5 Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save your file.
6 To recall your file, press the desired [F] – [I] buttons in the SETUP FILES display, then
select the desired file.
If you want to call up the factory default files, select the file in the PRESET tab. When the file is selected,
a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button.
SETUP FILES
[F] SYSTEM
SETUP FILES
Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] TA B
[ ][ ] MENU1 [J] UTILITY are handled as a single System Setup
file. Refer to the Data List for details on which parameters belong to the
System Setup.
[G] MIDI SETUP
FILES
The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the USER tab display
are handled as a single file.
[H] USER EFFECT
FILES
The User Effect settings including the following data are managed as a
single file.
User Effect Types .........................page 83
User Master EQ Types ................page 85
User Compressor Types...............page 86
User Microphone Settings ...........page 67
[I] MUSIC
FINDER FILES
All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a
single file.
CVP-701 Reference Manual 107
Utility / System – Making Global Settings –
12
This function lets you restore the status of the instrument to the original factory settings.
Call up the operation display.
[FUNCTION] TA B [ ][ ] MENU2 [G] SYSTEM TAB [ ][ ] RESET
1 Select the desired item to be restored by using [1] – [3] buttons and add a
checkmark to it by pressing the [4]/[5] button.
To remove the checkmark, press the [4]/[5] button.
2 Press the [I] (FACTORY RESET EXECUTE) button to carry out the Factory Reset
operation for all checkmarked items.
RESET
SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. Refer to
the Data List for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup.
MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the USER tab dis-
play to the original factory status.
USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the following data to the original
factory settings.
User Effect Types......................... page 83
User Master EQ Types................ page 85
User Compressor Types .............. page 86
User Microphone Settings........... page 67
MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory settings.
FILES & FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the USER tab display.
REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected
Bank. The same can be done also by turning the power button ON while
holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard).
2
Factory Reset
(see below)
108 CVP-701 Reference Manual
Index
Numerics
1-16 ................................................ 50
4', 2 2/3', 2' ..................................... 17
A
ACCENT TYPE .............................. 31
Accompaniment ............................. 18
ACMP ON/OFF DEFAULT ............. 19
Ad Hoc Mode ................................. 93
ADD TO FAVORITE ...................... 71
ADD TO MF ................................... 69
AMPLITUDE .................................. 14
Any Key .......................................... 43
APPEND ........................................ 73
ARABIC1/2 ..................................... 10
ASSEMBLY .............................. 24, 28
ASSIGN ........................................... 9
Assignable Pedal Functions ........... 89
ATTACK ......................................... 15
AUTO CH SET ............................... 41
AUTO POWER OFF .................... 101
AUX IN NOISE GATE .................. 102
B
BACKUP/RESTORE .................... 105
BANK ............................................. 74
BAR CLEAR ................................... 32
BAR COPY .................................... 32
BASE NOTE .................................. 11
BASIC ............................................ 24
BEAT CONVERTER ...................... 30
BLOCK ........................................... 82
BOOST/CUT .................................. 31
BRIGHT (Brightness) ..................... 14
BRIGHTNESS ................................ 81
C
CANCEL (Music Finder) ................. 73
CENTER PEDAL ........................... 14
channel .................................... 38, 39
CHANNEL (Song Creator) ....... 50, 60
CHANNEL (Style Creator) ..24, 31, 32
Channel Events ..............................60
Channel settings .............................41
CHANNEL TRANSPOSE ...............62
CHORD (Song Creator) ..................50
CHORD DETECTION AREA ..........21
CHORD DETECTION PRIORITY ...42
Chord Events ..................................64
CHORD NOTE ONLY .......................9
CHORD ON/OFF ............................38
CHORD SYS/EX. ...........................97
CHORUS ........................................82
CHORUS DEPTH (Voice Set) ........15
CHORUS DEPTH (VRM Voice) ........6
CLOCK ...........................................96
Clock setting ...................................96
COLOR ...........................................39
COMMON .......................................13
Compressor ....................................86
CONFIG1 ......................................100
CONFIG2 ......................................102
Connections ....................................88
CONTROLLER .........................11, 88
CONTROLLER (Voice Set) ............14
Cool! .................................................4
D
DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH
(VRM Voice) ..................................6
DECAY ...........................................15
DELAY (Vibrato) .............................15
DELETE ............26, 51, 61, 63, 75, 77
Delete (rhythm) ...............................27
DEPTH (Vibrato) .............................15
DRIVE LIST ..................................104
DRUM KIT ........................................7
Drums ...............................................4
DSP (Voice Set) .......................15, 16
DSP1-4 (Mixing Console) ...............82
DYNAMICS .....................................31
DYNAMICS CONTROL ..................19
E
Echo Types ...................................... 9
EDIT (Registration Memory) ........... 74
EDIT (Style Creator) .......................24
Editing Records .............................. 72
Editing Styles .................................24
Editing Voices ................................ 12
EFFECT ......................................... 82
Effect .............................................. 82
EFFECT/EQ .............................15, 17
EG .................................................. 15
EQ ............................................ 16, 84
EQUAL ........................................... 10
Equalizer ........................................ 84
EXPAND/COMP. ............................ 31
F
Fade In/Out .................................. 100
FAST FORWARD TYPE ................ 42
FILES (Music Finder) ..................... 73
FILES & FOLDERS ...................... 107
FILTER (Mixing Console) ............... 81
FILTER (Voice Set) ........................14
FINE ............................................... 30
Follow Lights .................................. 43
Foot Controller ............................... 88
FOOTAGE ...................................... 17
Footswitch ......................................88
FORMAT ...................................... 105
FREEZE ......................................... 76
Freeze ............................................ 76
FUNCTION ..................................... 14
G
GM ...................................................5
GROOVE ....................................... 24
GUIDE ............................................41
Guide .............................................. 43
GUIDE/CHANNEL ..........................41
CVP-701 Reference Manual 109
H
HARMO. (Harmonic content) ..........14
HARMONIC CONTENT ..................81
Harmony .........................................16
Harmony Types ................................8
headphones ..................................102
HIGH KEY ......................................37
I
I.A. CONTROL .............................102
Infrastructure ..................................92
K
Karao-Key ......................................43
KEY OFF SAMPLE ..........................7
KEY SIGNATURE ..........................39
KEYBOARD HARMONY ..................8
KEYBOARD/PANEL .......................11
KIRNBERGER ................................10
L
LANGUAGE .................................105
LEFT ...................................14, 38, 39
LEFT PEDAL ..................................14
LENG (Length) ...............................17
LFO ................................................14
Live! ..................................................3
Live! Drums ......................................4
Live! SFX ..........................................4
Local Control ..................................96
Loop Recording ..............................25
LOWER ..........................................21
LYRICS (Score) ..............................39
LYRICS (Song Creator) ..................50
Lyrics Events ..................................65
LYRICS LANGUAGE .....................42
M
MANUAL BASS ..............................21
MARK ON/OFF ..............................11
Master EQ ......................................85
MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE ........9
MEAN-TONE ..................................10
MegaVoice .......................................4
MegaVoices ......................................5
MEQ ...............................................85
MESSAGE SW
(Message Switch) .......................96
Metronome ................................... 101
MIC SETTING ................................ 66
Microphone .................................... 66
MIDI Settings ................................. 94
MIDI SETUP ................................ 107
MIDI SETUP FILES ...................... 106
MIX ................................................. 62
Mixing Console .............................. 79
MODE ............................................ 17
MODULATION (Voice Set) ............ 14
MONO/POLY ................................. 13
Multi Assign Type ............................. 9
MUSIC FINDER ........................... 107
Music Finder .................................. 69
MUSIC FINDER FILES ................ 106
Music Notation ............................... 38
N
Natural! ............................................ 3
NOTE ....................................... 39, 40
Note Events ................................... 64
NOTE LIMIT ................................... 37
NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ...... 35
NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..... 35
O
OCTAVE ........................................ 81
One Touch Setting ......................... 23
Organ Flutes .................................. 17
Organ Flutes! ................................... 4
ORIGINAL BEAT ........................... 30
OTHERS ........................................ 41
OTS INFO ...................................... 23
OTS LINK TIMING ......................... 19
Overdub Recording ........................ 25
OWNER ....................................... 105
OWNER NAME ............................ 105
P
P.A.T. ............................................. 43
Pan ................................................. 79
PARAMETER ................................. 24
PARAMETER LOCK .................... 104
PART OCTAVE .............................. 13
PART ON/OFF (Style Setting) ....... 20
PART SELECT .............................. 11
PEDAL ........................................... 88
Pedal .............................................. 88
PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT .................58
Performance Assistant ....................45
PHRASE MARK REPEAT ..............41
PIANO ..............................................6
Pitch ..................................................9
PITCH BEND RANGE ....................81
POPUP DISPLAY TIME ...............103
PORTAMENTO TIME ...............13, 81
PROPERTY ..................................104
Punch In/Out ...................................57
PURE MAJOR ................................10
PURE MINOR .................................10
PYTHAGOREAN ............................10
Q
QUANTIZE (Score) .........................39
QUANTIZE (Song Creator) .............61
QUANTIZE (Style Creator) .............32
QUICK START ................................43
R
Realtime Recording
(Style Creator) .............................25
REC END (Punch Out) ...................57
REC MODE (Song Creator) ............50
REC START (Punch In) ..................57
RECEIVE TRANSPOSE .................96
Recording (Song Creator) ...............49
Recording (Song) ............................46
Recording (Style Creator) ...............24
REGIST ........................................107
REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE ......76
Registration Memory .......................74
REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ........76
Registration Sequence ...................78
RELES. (Release) ..........................15
REMOVE EVENT ...........................32
REPEAT MODE ..............................42
Repeat playback .............................41
REPERTOIRE ................................22
REPLACE .......................................73
RESET ..........................................107
RESP (Response) ..........................17
REVERB .........................................82
REVERB DEPTH (Voice Set) .........15
REVERB DEPTH (VRM Voice) ........6
Rhythm ...........................................18
RIGHT ................................14, 38, 39
RTR (Retrigger Rule) ......................37
110 CVP-701 Reference Manual
S
S.Art! ................................................ 3
SAVE
......... 12, 27, 29, 63, 67, 84, 87, 106
Scale .............................................. 10
SCALE TUNE ................................ 10
SCORE .......................................... 38
Score .............................................. 38
SECTION SET ............................... 20
SET UP (Score) ............................. 39
SETUP ........................................... 50
SETUP (Song Creator) .................. 59
SETUP FILES .............................. 106
SFX .................................................. 4
Sing ................................................ 66
SIZE ............................................... 39
Song ............................................... 38
SONG AUTO OPEN .................... 105
SONG CREATOR .......................... 50
Song Creator .................................. 50
Song Recording ............................. 46
SOUND (Metronome) ................... 101
SOUND (Voice Set) ....................... 14
SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/
CHORD ...................................... 34
SPEAKER .................................... 102
Speaker ........................................ 102
SPEED (Harmony/Echo) .................. 9
SPEED (Vibrato) ............................ 15
SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING ..
..................................................... 21
START/STOP (MIDI) ...................... 96
Step Recording
(Song Creator) ...................... 50, 54
Step Recording (Style Creator) ...... 28
STEREOPHONIC OPTIMIZER .... 102
STOP ACMP .................................. 19
STRENGTH ................................... 31
STRING RESONANCE DEPTH
(VRM Voice) ................................. 6
Style ............................................... 18
Style Assembly .............................. 28
STYLE CREATOR ......................... 24
Style Creator .................................. 24
Style File Format ............................ 33
Style Playback ............................... 18
STYLE SETTING ........................... 18
STYLE TEMPO ............................ 103
Super Articulation ........................... 89
Sweet! .............................................. 4
SWING ........................................... 30
SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW ..........20
SYS/EX. (MIDI) ...............................96
SYS/EX. (Song Creator) .................50
SYSTEM .......................................105
System ..........................................100
System Exclusive Events ................64
SYSTEM SETUP ..........................107
SYSTEM SETUP FILES ...............106
T
TALK ...............................................66
Tap Percussion .............................101
TEMPO (Style Setting) ...................20
TIME SIGNATURE .......................101
TIME STAMP ................................103
TOUCH LIMIT ...................................9
TOUCH SENSE (Voice Set) ...........13
Touch sensitivity .............................13
TRACK 1/2 .....................................41
TRANSMIT CLOCK ........................96
TRANSPOSE .................................11
transpose ........................................11
TRANSPOSE (Mixing Console) ......81
TUNE ........................................11, 81
TUNING ..........................................81
tuning ................................................9
TUNING CURVE ..............................7
U
UPPER ...........................................21
USB ..............................................104
USER EFFECT .............................107
USER EFFECT FILES ..................106
UTILITY ........................................100
Utility .............................................100
V
VELOCITY CHANGE ......................32
VERSION .....................................105
VIB. SPEED ....................................17
VIBE ROTOR .................................15
VIBRATO ........................................15
VOCAL ...........................................66
Voice (Mixing Console) ...................80
VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON
OPTIONS ..................................103
Voice Characteristics ........................3
VOICE EFFECT ...............................8
VOICE NUMBER .......................... 103
VOICE SET ....................................12
Voice Set ........................................ 12
VOICE SET FILTER ....................... 16
VOICE SETTING .............................. 6
Voices .............................................. 3
VOL (Volume) ................................ 17
VOL/VOICE .................................... 79
VOLUME (Harmony/Echo) ............... 9
VOLUME (Metronome) ................. 101
Volume (Mixing Console) ............... 79
VOLUME (Voice Set) ..................... 13
VOLUME/ATTACK .........................17
VRM ............................................. 3, 5
W
WERCKMEISTER .......................... 10
WIRELESS LAN ............................. 92
Wireless LAN Settings .................... 92
WPS ............................................... 92
X
XG ....................................................5
Y
Your Tempo ...................................43
Manual Development Department
© 2015 Yamaha Corporation
Published 7/2015 MW-A0

Transcripción de documentos

CV P- 701 Reference Manual This Reference Manual explains advanced features of this instrument that are not explained in the Owner’s Manual. Please read the Owner’s Manual first, before reading this Reference Manual. EN Contents 1 Piano Room – Enjoying Piano Performance – 3 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 Voice Characteristics .........................................................3 Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel....................................................................5 Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices .......................................................................5 Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices .....................................................6 Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices ....................7 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type......................................8 Pitch-Related Settings .......................................................9 Editing Voices (Voice Set) ...............................................12 Editing Organ Flutes Parameters.....................................17 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 18 Style Playback Settings ...................................................18 Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand....................................21 Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire)......................................................................22 Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting .....................23 Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents ...................23 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) ............................24 8 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – 69 Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/ STYLE) ............................................................................69 Creating a Set of Favorite Records..................................71 Editing Records................................................................72 Saving the Record as a Single File..................................73 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 74 Deleting or Renaming the Registration ............................74 Confirming the Registration Memory Information ............75 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) .....................76 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) ..................................................76 10 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 79 Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters ......................................79 Editing FILTER Parameters .............................................81 Editing TUNE Parameters................................................81 Editing EFFECT Parameters ...........................................82 Editing EQ Parameters ....................................................84 Selecting the Master EQ Type .........................................85 Editing Master Compressor Settings ...............................86 4 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 38 11 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 88 Editing Music Notation Settings .......................................38 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback .................................................................40 Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function)...................................41 Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings .................................88 Wireless LAN Settings .....................................................92 MIDI Settings ...................................................................94 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 46 Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies ..............46 Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) ...........................49 6 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playback and Recording Audio Files – 66 7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – 66 12 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 100 CONFIG1 .......................................................................100 CONFIG2 .......................................................................102 PARAMETER LOCK......................................................104 USB................................................................................104 OWNER .........................................................................105 BACKUP/RESTORE......................................................105 SETUP FILES ................................................................106 RESET ...........................................................................107 Index 108 Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk)......................................................................66 * Each chapter in this Reference Manual corresponds to the relevant chapters in the Owner’s Manual Using the PDF manual • To quickly jump to items and topics of interest, click on the desired items in the “Bookmarks” index to the left of the main display window. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.) • Click the page numbers that appear in this manual to go directly to the corresponding page. • Select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a keyword to locate related information anywhere in the document. NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. 2 CVP-701 Reference Manual Piano Room – Enjoying Piano Performance – These operations are fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in the Owner’s Manual. 1 2 Voices Voices – Playing the Keyboard – – Playing the Keyboard – Contents Voice Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Pitch-Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 • Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 • Scale Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 • Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Editing Voices (Voice Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 • Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 • Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Editing Organ Flutes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Voice Characteristics The Voice type and its defining characteristics are indicated above the Voice name in the Voice Selection display. VRM (Virtual Resonance Modeling) See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2. Natural! Natural! Voices are high quality sounds on many specialist sampling techniques. They are especially suited to recreating Piano and other keyboard instruments. Live! Live! Voices feature stereo sampling, to reproduce accurately the stereo image of an acoustic instrument, as well as the ambience of the room it was recorded in. S.Art! (Super Articulation) See the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2. CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Cool! Cool! Voices reproduce the complex characteristics of Electric Instruments, by utilizing sophisticated programming techniques in both voicing, and the use of DSP effects. Sweet! Sweet! Voices are acoustic instruments which feature the sampled vibrato of the original player, creating a far more realistic and emotional performance than synthesized vibrato. Drums Drum & Percussion instruments are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or use in music production. Live! Drums Stereo sampling is used for these high definition Drum and Percussion instruments, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or use in music production. SFX Special percussion and sound effects are mapped across the keyboard, so you can play them directly, or use in music production. Live! SFX Stereo sampling is used for these high definition special percussion and sound effects, which are mapped across the keyboard so you can play them directly, or use in music production. Organ Flutes! OrganFlutes! lets you create your own Organ registrations, by combining Organ Flute Footages at different pitches, just like a real organ. See page 17 for details. MegaVoice MegaVoice is a special Voice format designed for use in styles and songs, not for live performance. Different velocity ranges are used to select dramatically different playing styles simultaneously, and without changing the voice. Actual sound maps for the MegaVoices are given in the separate Data List booklet that comes with your instrument. NOTE MegaVoices are not compatible with other models even though the model may have those types of Voices installed. Any Song or Style data you’ve created on the instrument using these Voices will not sound properly when played back on other instruments. NOTE MegaVoices sound differently depending on the keyboard range, velocity, touch, etc. Hence, if you apply a harmony or echo effect, change the transpose setting or change the Voice Set parameters, unexpected or undesired sounds may result. 4 CVP-701 Reference Manual Selecting GM&XG, MegaVoices and Other Voices from the Panel The GM&XG Voices and MegaVoice cannot be directly called up from the VOICE category selection buttons. However, they can be called up via panel operation by following the procedure below. 2 3 In the Main display, select the keyboard part to which the desired Voice is to be assigned. Press one of the VOICE category selection buttons to call up the Voice Selection display. Press the [8] (UP) button to call up the Voice categories. 3 4 5 6 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 1 4 Press the [2] (P2) button to display Page 2. Press the desired [A] – [J] button to call up the Voice Selection display of GM&XG Voices, GM2 Voices, etc. Select the desired Voice. Adjusting the Depth of Reverb and Chorus for VRM Voices When you select a Piano Voice compatible with VRM (referred to as VRM Voices), you can adjust the depth of the Reverb and Chorus effect that is applied to the VRM Voices. 1 Select the VRM Voice. Press the VOICE category [PIANO] button to call up the Voice Selection display, then select a Voice having a “VRM” indication above its name. CVP-701 Reference Manual 5 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [L][R] PIANO 3 4 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 4 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “1. VRM/DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH/STRING RESONANCE DEPTH/REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH.” Use the [5]/[6] buttons for adjusting the reverb depth and the [7]/[8] buttons for the chorus depth applied to the VRM Voices. This setting is applied commonly to all parts for which VRM Voices are selected. Adjusting the Tuning Curve and Volume of the Key-Off Sound for Piano Voices You can adjust the tuning curve and volume of the key-off sound (the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key) for Piano Voices. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [L][R] PIANO Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TUNING CURVE/KEY OFF SAMPLING DEPTH.” 2 3 6 CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the appropriate settings or to adjust the value. [3]/ [4] TUNING CURVE Determines the tuning curve. Select “FLAT” if you want the tuning curve of the piano Voice to most accurately match that of other instruments Voices. STRETCH: Tuning curve often employed by piano tuners to make the upper octaves sound more natural. Best for solo piano performance. FLAT: Tuning curve in which the frequencies of the notes are repeated for each octave over the entire keyboard range. KEY OFF SAMPLE 2 Adjusts the volume of the key-off sound. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – [5]/ [6] Confirm the Assignments of Drum Kit Voices When you select one of the specific Drum Kit Voices below, you can confirm the key assignments in the Drum Kit Tutor display. Compatible Drum Kit Voices: StandardKit1, StandardKit2, HitKit, RoomKit, RockKit, JazzKit, BrushKit, SymphonyKit, StudioKit, PowerKit1, PowerKit2, AcousticKit, RealDrums Call up the Drum Kit Tutor display. Select the compatible Drum Kit Voice in the Voice Selection display → [8] MENU1 → [4] (DRUM KIT) 2 1 NOTE The Drum Kit Tutor display is not available for some Drum Kit Voices for which the “DRUM KIT” button is not available in MENU1 at the bottom of the Voice Selection display. In the default setting, the C3-B3 range of the keyboard is shown for confirming the assignments. When you press a key, the instrument name assigned to the key is shown in the display. To confirm other assignments outside that range, use the [D]/[E] or [I]/[J] buttons to shift the keyboard illustration left or right by one octave in the display, or press a key in another octave. CVP-701 Reference Manual 7 Selecting the Harmony/Echo type This function lets you apply harmonies to your right hand performance according to the chords you play with your left hand, and trigger automatic echo or tremolo even by pressing a single note or two notes. 1 Press the [VOICE EFFECT] button. 2 Turn the Keyboard Harmony on by pressing the [I] (KEYBOARD HARMONY) button. 3 Call up the operation display by pressing the [J] (TYPE SELECT) button. 4 2 Use the [1] – [3] buttons to select the Harmony/Echo type. The Harmony/Echo types are divided into the following groups, depending on the particular effect applied. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – Harmony Types These types apply the harmony effect to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard according to the chord specified in the left-hand section of the keyboard. (Note that the “1+5” and “Octave” settings are not affected by the chord.) Multi Assign Type This type applies a special effect to chords played in the right-hand section of the keyboard. Echo Types These types apply echo effects to notes played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo.  Harmony Types When one of the Harmony Types is selected, the Harmony effect is applied to the note played in the righthand section of the keyboard according to the type selected above and the chord specified in the chord section of the keyboard shown below. If you want to use these Types, play back the style or set the “STOP ACMP” parameter (page 19) to a setting other than “DISABLED.” Split Point Split Point RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect Split Point (for Style playback) LEFT Voice and chord section for Harmony effect Split Point (for the Voice) LEFT Voice Chord section for Style playback and Harmony effect 8 CVP-701 Reference Manual RIGHT 1 and 2 Voices  Multi Assign Type The Multi Assign effect automatically assigns notes played simultaneously on the right-hand section of the keyboard to separate parts (Voices). Both keyboard parts [RIGHT 1] and [RIGHT 2] should be turned on when using the Multi Assign effect. The Right 1 and Right 2 Voices are alternately assigned to the notes in the order you play.  Echo Types When one of the Echo Types is selected, the corresponding effect (echo, tremolo, trill) is applied to the note played in the right-hand section of the keyboard in time with the currently set tempo, regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] and the LEFT part on/off status. Keep in mind that Trill only works when you hold down two notes on the keyboard simultaneously (last two notes if more than two notes are held), and it plays those notes alternately. 2 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to select various Harmony/Echo settings. The available settings differ depending on the Harmony/Echo type. [4] VOLUME This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the level of the harmony/echo notes generated by the Harmony/Echo effect. [5] SPEED This parameter is only available when Echo, Tremolo, or Trill is selected in Type above. It determines the speed of the Echo, Tremolo, and Trill effects. [6] ASSIGN This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” This lets you determine the keyboard part via which the harmony/echo notes will be sounded. [7] CHORD NOTE ONLY This parameter is available when one of the Harmony Types is selected. When this is set to “ON,” the Harmony effect is applied only to notes (played in the right-hand section of the keyboard) that belong to a chord played in the chord section of the keyboard. [8] TOUCH LIMIT This parameter is available for all types with the exception of “Multi Assign.” It determines the lowest velocity value at which the harmony note will sound. This allows you to selectively apply the harmony by your playing strength, letting you create harmony accents in the melody. The harmony effect is applied when you play the key strongly (above the set value). Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 5 Pitch-Related Settings Fine-tuning the Pitch of the Entire Instrument You can fine-tune the pitch of the entire instrument — a useful feature when playing the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. Please note that the Tuning function does not affect the Drum Kit or SFX Kit Voices with name “*** kit” and audio files. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [L][R] MASTER TUNE Use the [4]/[5] buttons to set the tuning in 0.2 Hz steps, from 414.8–466.8 Hz. Press the both 4 or 5’s [] and [] buttons simultaneously to reset the value to the factory setting of 440.0 Hz. CVP-701 Reference Manual 9 Scale Tuning You can select various scales for playing in custom tunings for specific historical periods or music genres. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [E] MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE → TAB [L][R] SCALE TUNE Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired scale. 2 The tuning of each note for the currently selected scale is shown. Voices – Playing the Keyboard –  Preset Scale types 10 EQUAL The pitch range of each octave is divided equally into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used tuning in music today. PURE MAJOR, PURE MINOR These tunings preserve the pure mathematical intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords (root, third, fifth). You can hear this best in actual vocal harmonies — such as choirs and a cappella singing. PYTHAGOREAN This scale was devised by the famous Greek philosopher and is created from a series of perfect fifths, which are collapsed into a single octave. The 3rd in this tuning is slightly unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MEAN-TONE This scale was created as an improvement on the Pythagorean scale, by making the major third interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel, among others, used this scale. WERCKMEISTER, KIRNBERGER This composite scale combines the Werckmeister and Kirnberger systems, which were themselves improvements on the mean-tone and Pythagorean scales. The main feature of this scale is that each key has its own unique character. The scale was used extensively during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and even now it is often used when performing period music on the harpsichord. ARABIC1, ARABIC2 Use these tunings when playing Arabic music. CVP-701 Reference Manual Change the following settings as necessary. [2] BASE NOTE Determines the base note for each scale. When the base note is changed, the pitch of the keyboard is transposed, yet maintains the original pitch relationship between the notes. [3] – [5] TUNE Select the desired note to be tuned by using the [3] buttons and tune it in cents by using the [4]/[5] buttons. 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 NOTE In musical terms a “cent” is 1/100th of a semitone. (100 cents equal one semitone.) [6]/ [7] PART SELECT [8] MARK ON/OFF Select the part to which the Scale Tune setting is applied by using the [6]/[7] buttons. Then press the [8] button to add a checkmark or press the [8] button to remove the checkmark. NOTE To register the Scale Tune settings to the Registration Memory, be sure to checkmark the SCALE item in the REGISTRATION MEMORY CONTENTS display. NOTE If a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of all VRM Voices is set to the same scale type as that of the RIGHT1 part. If a Voice other than a VRM Voice is selected as the RIGHT1 part, the resonance of any other VRM Voices is set to “Equal.” Changing the Part Assignment of the TRANSPOSE Buttons You can determine to which part (keyboard, Song or both) the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons are applied. This lets you transpose the pitch of the keyboard but not that of the Song (or vice versa) — allowing you to play along with a Song in a more comfortable key, for example. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [L][R] KEYBOARD/PANEL 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select “2. TRANSPOSE ASSIGN.” 3 Press the [4]/[5] buttons to select the desired transpose type. KEYBOARD When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the pitch of keyboard played Voices and Style playback (controlled by the performance in the chord section of the keyboard) — but they do not affect Song playback. SONG When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect only the pitch of Song playback. MASTER When this is selected, the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons affect the overall pitch of the instrument, except audio playback. You can confirm the setting here by viewing the pop-up window called up via the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons. CVP-701 Reference Manual 11 Editing Voices (Voice Set) The instrument has a Voice Set feature that allows you to create your own Voices by editing some parameters of the existing Voices. Once you’ve created a Voice, you can save it as a User Voice to the USER drive or external devices for future recall. 1 2 2 3 Select the desired Voice (other than an Organ Flutes Voice). Organ Flutes Voices have a different editing method than described here. For instructions on editing the Organ Flutes Voices, see page 17. Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [5] (VOICE SET) button to call up the VOICE SET display. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 4 6 5 4 5 6 Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. For information on the available parameters in each display, see the “Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays” on page 13. As necessary, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the item (parameter) to be edited and edit the Voice by using the [1] – [8] buttons. By pressing the [D] (COMPARE) button, you can compare the sound of the edited Voice with the original (unedited) Voice. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 12 CVP-701 Reference Manual Editable Parameters in the VOICE SET Displays The Voice Set parameters are organized into several different displays. The parameters in each display are described separately, below. NOTE The available parameters differ depending on the Voice.  COMMON Page VOLUME Adjusts the volume of the current edited Voice. [2]/ [3] TOUCH SENSE Adjusts the touch sensitivity (velocity sensitivity), or how greatly the volume responds to your playing strength. TOUCH SENSE DEPTH TOUCH SENSE OFFSET Changes to velocity curve according to VelDepth (with Offset set to 64) Changes to velocity curve according to VelOffset (with Depth set to 64) Actual Velocity for tone generator Actual Velocity for tone generator Offset = 96 (+64) Offset = 127 (+127) Depth = 127 (twice) 127 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – [1] 127 Offset = 64 (normal) Depth = 64 (normal) 64 64 Depends on offset Depth = 32 (half) Offset = 32 (-64) Depth = 0 0 64 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) 0 64 Depends on offset 127 Received Velocity (Actual KeyOn speed) Offset = 0 (-127) DEPTH Determines the velocity sensitivity, or how much the level of the Voice changes in response to your playing strength (velocity). OFFSET Determines the amount by which received velocities are adjusted for the actual velocity effect. [4]/ [5] PART OCTAVE Shifts the octave range of the edited Voice up or down in octaves. When the edited Voice is used as any of the RIGHT 1–2 parts, the R1/R2 parameter is available; when the edited Voice is used as the LEFT part, the LEFT parameter is available. [6] MONO/POLY Determines whether the edited Voice is played monophonically or polyphonically. [7] PORTAMENTO TIME Sets the portamento time (pitch transition time) when the edited Voice is set to “MONO” above. NOTE The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. CVP-701 Reference Manual 13  CONTROLLER Page 1 CENTER PEDAL 2 LEFT PEDAL These allow you to select the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal. 2 [1] FUNCTION Selects the function to be assigned to the center or left pedal. For details on the pedal functions, see page 88. [2] – [8] RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, etc. Determines whether the assigned function is effective or not for the respective keyboard part. This also determines the depth for the function. For details, see page 88. Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 MODULATION When a pedal function is assigned to MODULATION, the pedal can be used to modulate the parameters below as well as the pitch (vibrato). Here, you can set the degree to which the pedal modulates each of the following parameters. [2] FILTER Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter cutoff frequency. For details about the filter, see page 14. [3] AMPLITUDE Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude (volume). [5] LFO PMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the pitch, or the vibrato effect. [6] LFO FMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the Filter modulation, or the wah effect. [7] LFO AMOD Determines the degree to which the pedal modulates the amplitude, or the tremolo effect.  SOUND Page FILTER Filter is a processor that changes the timbre or tone of a sound by either blocking or passing a specific frequency range. The parameters below determine the overall timbre of the sound by boosting or cutting a certain frequency range. In addition to making the sound either brighter or mellower, Filter can be used to produce electronic, synthesizer-like effects. [1] BRIGHT (Brightness) Determines the cutoff frequency or effective frequency range of the filter (see diagram). Higher values result in a brighter sound. Volume Cutoff Frequency These frequencies are “passed” by the filter. [2] HARMO. (Harmonic content) Determines the emphasis given to the cutoff frequency (resonance), set in BRIGHT. above (see diagram). Higher values result in a more pronounced effect. Cutoff range Frequency (pitch) Volume Resonance Frequency (pitch) 14 CVP-701 Reference Manual Level Sustain Level ATTACK Key on DECAY RELEASE Time Key off [3] ATTACK Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after the key is played. The lower the value, the quicker the attack. [4] DECAY Determines how quickly the sound reaches its sustain level (a slightly lower level than maximum). The lower the value, the quicker the decay. [5] RELES. (Release) Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. The lower the value, the quicker the decay. VIBRATO Vibrato is a quavering, vibrating sound effect that is produced by regularly modulating the pitch of the Voice. 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – EG The EG (Envelope Generator) settings determine how the level of the sound changes in time. This lets you reproduce many sound characteristics of natural acoustic instruments — such as the quick attack and decay of percussion sounds, or the long release of a sustained piano tone. Pitch SPEED DEPTH DELAY Time [6] DEPTH Determines the intensity of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings result in a more pronounced Vibrato. [7] SPEED Determines the speed of the Vibrato effect. [8] DELAY Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the Vibrato effect. Higher settings increase the delay of the Vibrato onset.  EFFECT/EQ Page 1 REVERB DEPTH/CHORUS DEPTH/DSP DEPTH/VIB ROTOR [1]/ [2] REVERB DEPTH Adjusts the reverb depth. The setting cannot be changed when a VRM Voice is selected. [3]/ [4] CHORUS DEPTH Adjusts the chorus depth. The setting cannot be changed when a VRM Voice is selected. [5] DSP ON/OFF Determines whether the DSP is on or off. [6] DSP DEPTH Adjusts the DSP depth. If you want to re-select the DSP type, you can do so in the “2 DSP” menu explained on page 16. [7] VIBE ROTOR This will be displayed only if VibeRotor is selected for the DSP Type parameter explained on page 16. Determines whether VibeRotor should be set to on or off when selecting the Voice. CVP-701 Reference Manual 15 2 DSP [1] – [4] DSP TYPE Selects the DSP effect category and type. Select the desired category first, then a type. [6] VARI. A Variation parameter is provided for each DSP type. By turning this on or off, you can instantly and significantly change the sound of the DSP effect. Here, you can edit the VARI. (Variation) on/off status and the parameter value for each status (in DETAIL below). [5]/ [7] DETAIL Calls up the detailed setting display. Press the [5] button for editing the standard parameter value, and the [7] button for editing the Variation parameter value. In the detailed setting display, select the desired parameter by using the [2] – [4] buttons then adjust the value by using the [5] – [6] buttons. This differs depending on the effect type and cannot be changed. Press the [EXIT] button to close the setting display. 2 Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 3 EQ Determines the Frequency and Gain of the Low and High EQ bands. For information about EQ, refer to page 84.  HARMONY Page Harmony sets the Right 1 and 2 parts together. Before you set these parameters, make sure the Right 1 part is selected in the Main display. This has the same settings as the display of “Selecting the Harmony/Echo type” page 8 in step 3. Disabling Automatic Selection of Voice Sets (Effects, etc.) Each Voice is linked to its default VOICE SET parameter settings. Usually these settings are automatically called up when a Voice is selected. However, you can also disable this feature by the operation in the relevant display as explained below. For example, if you want to change the Voice yet keep the same Harmony effect, set the KEYBOARD HARMONY parameter to OFF (in the display explained below). 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [F] VOICE SETTING → TAB [L][R] VOICE SET FILTER Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a keyboard part. 2 3 3 16 Use the [4] – [8] buttons to enable/disable automatic calling up of the settings (ON or OFF) independently for each parameter group. CVP-701 Reference Manual Editing Organ Flutes Parameters The Organ Flute Voices selected from the [ORGAN FLUTES] button can be edited by adjusting the footage levers, adding the attack sound, applying effects and equalizer, etc. NOTICE After editing, go to the Voice Selection display by pressing the [I] (PRESETS) button and save the setting. The settings will be lost if you select another Voice or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.  FOOTAGE Page Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 2.  VOLUME/ATTACK Page Voices – Playing the Keyboard – 2 Same as the FOOTAGE Page. [1] VOL (Volume) Adjusts the overall volume of the Organ Flutes. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the volume. [2] RESP (Response) Affects both the attack and release (page 15) portion of the sound, increasing or decreasing the response time of the initial swell and release, based on the FOOTAGE controls. The higher the value, the slower the swell and release. [3] VIB. SPEED Determines the speed of the vibrato effect controlled by the VIBRATO ON/OFF ([F]/[G] buttons) and VIBRATO DEPTH ([H] button). [4] MODE The MODE control selects one of two modes: FIRST and EACH. In the FIRST mode, attack (percussive sound) is applied only to the first notes played and held simultaneously; while the first notes are held, any subsequently played notes have no attack applied. In the EACH mode, attack is applied equally to all notes. [5] – [7] 4', 2 2/3', 2' These determine the attack sound volume of the ORGAN FLUTE Voice. The 4', 2-2/3' and 2' controls increase or reduce the volume of attack sound at the corresponding footages. The longer the graphic bar, the greater the attack sound volume. [8] LENG (Length) Affects the attack portion of the sound producing a longer or shorter decay immediately after the initial attack. The longer the graphic bar, the longer the decay.  EFFECT/EQ Page Same parameters as in the VOICE SET “EFFECT/EQ” Page explained on page 15. CVP-701 Reference Manual 17 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – Contents Style Playback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand. . . . . . . . . . 21 Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – • Realtime Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 • Step Recording (Inputting events one by one). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 • Style Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 • Editing the Rhythmic Feel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 • Editing Data for Each Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 • Making Style File Format Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Style Playback Settings The instrument has a variety of Style playback functions which can be accessed in the display below. 1 2 18 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [G] STYLE SETTING Use the [1] – [8] and [B]/[C]/[F] buttons for each setting. CVP-701 Reference Manual [B] OTS LINK TIMING This applies to the OTS Link function. This parameter determines the timing in which the One Touch Settings change with the MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] change. (The [OTS LINK] button must be on.) REAL TIME One Touch Setting is immediately called up when you press a MAIN VARIATION button. NEXT BAR One Touch Setting is called up at the next measure, after you press a MAIN VARIATION button. STOP ACMP When the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on, [SYNC START] is off, and this parameter is set to the value other than “DISABLED,” you can play chords in the chord section of the keyboard with the Style stopped, and still hear the accompaniment chord. In this condition — called “Stop Accompaniment” — any valid chord fingerings are recognized and the chord root/type are shown in the display. Here, you can determine whether the chord played in the chord section will sound or not in the Stop Accompaniment status. 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – [C] DISABLED Disables the Stop Accompaniment feature. When Style playback is stopped, any pressed notes in the chord section of the keyboard will not be recognized as chords. OFF The chord played in the chord section will not sound. STYLE The chord played in the chord section will sound via the Voices for the Pad part and the Bass channel of the selected Style. FIXED The chord played in the chord section will sound via the specified Voice, regardless of the selected Style. NOTE When the selected Style contains MegaVoices, unexpected sounds may result when this is set to “STYLE.” NOTE When you record a song, the chord detected by playing the Stop Accompaniment can be recorded regardless of the setting here. Please note that both the Voice that is sounded and the chord data will be recorded when set to “STYLE,” and only the chord data will be recorded when set to “OFF” or “FIXED.” NOTE When this is set to “DISABLED,” chords are not recognized while the Style is stopped. This is why Keyboard Harmony (page 8) is not applied even if you play a chord in the chord section of the keyboard while the Style is stopped. [F] ACMP ON/OFF DEFAULT Determines whether the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is on or off when the power is turned on. [1]/ [2] DYNAMICS CONTROL This determines how the Style playback volume changes depending on the playing strength. • WIDE ........... The volume changes over a wide range. • MEDIUM..... The volume changes over a medium range. • NARROW .... The volume changes over a narrow range. • OFF .............. The volume is kept the same regardless of playing strength. CVP-701 Reference Manual 19 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – [3]/ [4] SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW This determines how long you can hold a chord before the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled. When the [SYNC STOP] button is turned on and this is set to a value other than “OFF,” the Synchro Stop function is automatically cancelled if you hold a chord for longer than the time set here. This conveniently resets Style playback control to normal, letting you release the keys and still have the Style play. In other words, if you release the keys sooner than the time set here, the Synchro Stop function works. [5]/ [6] SECTION SET Determines the default section that is automatically called up when selecting different Styles (when Style playback is stopped). When set to “OFF” and Style playback is stopped, the active section is maintained even if the different Style is selected. When any of the MAIN A – D sections is not included in the Style data, the nearest section is automatically selected. For example, when MAIN D is not contained in the selected Style, MAIN C will be called up. [7] TEMPO This determines whether the tempo changes or not when you change Styles. If you want to avoid changing the tempo when selecting another Style, select LOCK or HOLD. LOCK The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained. HOLD The tempo setting of the previous Style is maintained while Style is played back and another Style is selected. While Style playback is stopped and another Style is selected, the tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. RESET The tempo changes to that of the initial default tempo for the selected Style. [8] PART ON/OFF This determines whether the on/off status of the Style Channels (Parts) changes or not when you change Styles. If you want to avoid changing the Style Channel On/Off status when selecting another Style, select LOCK or HOLD. LOCK The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained. HOLD The Style Channel On/Off status of the previous Style is maintained while Style is played back and another Style is selected. While Style playback is stopped and another Style is selected, all Style Channels are set to On. RESET All Style Channels are set to On. 20 CVP-701 Reference Manual Specifying Chords with Your Right Hand while Playing Bass with Your Left Hand By changing the Chord Detection area from the left-hand section to the right-hand section, you can play the bass line with your left hand while using your right hand to control Style playback. 1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [L][R] SPLIT POINT 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 2 Split Point (STYLE) LEFT Voice section (LOWER section) Split Point (LEFT) RIGHT 1, 2 Voices section (UPPER section) + Chord Section 2 Set the CHORD DETECTION AREA value to “UPPER” with the [1]/[2] buttons. 3 Press the [E] button to turn the MANUAL BASS function on. With this setting, the whole right-hand (UPPER) section works as the Chord section as well as melody performance. In this condition, note the following points: • In the right-hand (UPPER) section, you can specify the chord type as you play the melody. • The Bass Part Voice of the current Style is assigned to the Keyboard LEFT part. This is referred to as the Manual Bass function, which can be turned off or on via the [E] button. • Chord Fingering is set to a special type (“FINGERED*”) automatically, in which you should press three or more notes simultaneously for specifying the chord. Pressing two or fewer notes does not change the chord type. • Split Point (STYLE) is unavailable. CVP-701 Reference Manual 21 Searching for Suitable Songs for the Current Style (Repertoire) You can search for music pieces and songs that are most suitable for playing with the current Style by using the Repertoire function. You can automatically call up appropriate settings such as Voice, effect and pedal by selecting the desired music piece. Before using the Repertoire function, you need to import Music Finder records (see instructions described in the Owner's Manual, chapter 8). NOTE The settings shown here are Music Finder Records. You can choose additional settings by using the Music Finder feature. 1 2 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 Select the desired Style from the Style Selection display. Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [4] (REPERTOIRE) button. Various appropriate panel settings matching the selected Style will be shown in the display. 3 4 4 Use the [2] – [3] buttons to select the desired panel setting. NOTE Depending on the particular selected Style, there may not be any panel settings in the Repertoire function. 22 CVP-701 Reference Manual Memorizing an Original One Touch Setting While the panel settings appropriate for each preset Style are pre-programmed as One Touch Settings, you can also register your favorite settings to create original One Touch Settings. Because the One Touch Setting data is included in a Style, the Save operation will be done as a Style on the Style Selection display. 1 Select the desired Style to correspond to your One Touch Setting. 2 Set up the panel controls (such as Voice, effects, and so on) as desired. 3 Press the [MEMORY] button in the REGISTRATION MEMORY section. 4 5 3 4 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 Press one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. A message appears in the display prompting you to save the panel settings. Press [G] (YES) button to call up the Style Selection display and save the panel settings as a Style file. NOTICE The panel settings memorized to each OTS button will be lost if you change the Style or turn the power off without executing the Save operation. Confirming the One Touch Setting Contents You can check the information of the One Touch Setting [1] – [4] assigned to currently selected Style. 1 In the Style Selection display, call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary, then press the [6] (OTS INFO) button to call up the Information display. 2 1 NOTE You can also call up the Information display by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button then pressing one of the ONE TOUCH SETTING [1] – [4] buttons. 2 Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the Information display. CVP-701 Reference Manual 23 Creating/Editing Styles (Style Creator) Styles are made up of fifteen different sections (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) and each section has eight separate channels. With the Style Creator feature, you can create a Style by separately recording the channels, or by importing pattern data from other existing Styles. Sections Channels 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – You can use one of the three different methods described below to create a Style. The created Style can also be edited. • Realtime Recording This method lets you record the Style by simply playing the keyboard. See page 25. • Step Recording This method lets you to enter each note individually. See page 28. • Style Assembly This method lets you create a composite Style by combining various patterns from the internal preset Styles or from Styles you have already created. See page 28. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR 1 2 NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE. There are several Pages (tabs) in the Style Creator display. 24 • BASIC Creates the basic settings of the Style. You can also record your performance in realtime to create a new Style (Realtime Recording). See page 25. • ASSEMBLY Mixes the various parts (channels) from preset Styles or already created Styles to create a new Style. See page 28. • GROOVE Changes the rhythmic feel of your created Style. See page 30. • CHANNEL Edits data for each channel — quantizing, changing velocity, etc. See page 32. • PARAMETER Changes the settings related for Style File Format. See page 33. • EDIT Lets you enter notes one by one to create an original Style (Step Recording). See page 28. CVP-701 Reference Manual Realtime Recording In the BASIC Page, you can create a single Style by recording the individual channels one-by-one, using realtime recording. Realtime Recording Characteristics — Loop Recording and Overdub Recording • Loop Recording Style playback repeats the rhythm patterns of several measures in a “loop,” and Style recording is also done using loops. For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeatedly recorded. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition (loop), letting you record while hearing previously recorded material. • Overdub Recording This method records new material to a channel already containing recorded data, without deleting the original data. In Style recording, the recorded data is not deleted, except when using functions such as Rhythm Clear (page 27) and Delete (page 26). For example, if you start recording with a two-measure MAIN section, the two measures are repeated many times. Notes that you record will play back from the next repetition, letting you overdub new material to the loop while hearing previously recorded material. When creating a Style based on an existing internal Style, overdub recording is applied only to the rhythm channels. For all other channels (except rhythm), you need to delete the original data before recording. 2 3 4 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 1 3 When you want to create a Style based on an existing Style, select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up the Style Creator display. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR The BASIC Page is shown. If you want to create a new Style from scratch, press the [C] (NEW STYLE) button to delete the data of all channels. Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style. First close the RECORD display by pressing the [EXIT] button. Then use the [3]/[4] buttons to select the section to be recorded. 5-2 4 5-1 NOTE To call up the RECORD display again, press the [F] (REC CH) button. NOTE You can specify the sections to be recorded by using the Section buttons on the panel. Refer to step 3 on page 28. NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations. CVP-701 Reference Manual 25 5 6 Use the [5]/[6] buttons to determine the length (number of measures) of the selected section, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the specified length. Specify the channel to be recorded by simultaneously holding down the [F] (REC CH) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8]. To cancel the selection, press the corresponding [1] – [8] button again. 6 3 7 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 7 Call up the Voice Selection display by using the [1] – [8] buttons and select the desired Voice for the corresponding recording channels. Press the [EXIT] button to close the Voice Selection display. Recordable Voices • RHY1 channel Any except your original Organ Flute and Super Articulation Voices are recordable. • RHY2 channel Only drum/SFX kits are recordable. • BASS–PHR2 channels Any except your original Organ Flute, drum/SFX kits and Super Articulation Voices are recordable. NOTE Preset Organ Flute Voices can be recorded to the RHY1 and BASS–PHR2 channels. 8 If necessary, delete a channel by simultaneously holding down the [J] (DELETE) button and pressing the appropriate numbered button, [1] – [8]. You can cancel the deletion by pressing the same numbered button again before releasing your finger from the [J] button. NOTE When recording channels BASS–PHR2 based on an existing Style, you have to delete the original data before recording. 26 CVP-701 Reference Manual 9 Start recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. Playback of the specified section starts. Since the accompaniment pattern plays back repeatedly in a loop, you can record individual sounds one by one, listening to the previous sounds as they play. For information on recording to channels other than the rhythm channels (RHY1, 2), refer to the section “Rules when recording non-rhythm channels” below. NOTE You can turn off the desired channels by pressing the corresponding [1] – [8] buttons. Deleting recorded notes in the rhythm channel 3 10 To continue recording with another channel, repeat steps 6 – 9. 11 Stop recording by pressing the STYLE [START/STOP] button. 12 Press the [EXIT] button to close the RECORD display. 13 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – When you are recording the rhythm channel (RHY1 or RHY2), you can delete a specific instrument sound by simultaneously holding down the [E] (RHY CLEAR) button and pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Rules when recording non-rhythm channels • Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS and PHRASE channels (i.e., C, D, E, G, A, and B). • Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD channels (i.e., C, E, G, and B). C R C C R C C = Chord note C, R = Recommended note Using the data recorded here, the auto accompaniment (Style playback) is appropriately converted depending on the chord changes you make during your performance. The chord which forms the basis for this note conversion is called the Source Chord, and is set by default to CM7 (as in the example illustration above). You can change the Source Chord (its root and type) from the PARAMETER display on page 34. Keep in mind that when you change the Source Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change. For details on chord notes and recommended notes, see page 34. NOTE For the INTRO and ENDING sections, any desired chord or chord progression can be used. CVP-701 Reference Manual 27 Step Recording (Inputting events one by one) In the EDIT Page, you can record notes with absolutely precise timing. This Step Recording procedure is essentially the same as that for Song Recording (page 50) with the exception of the points listed below: • In the Song Creator, the End Mark position can be changed freely; in the Style Creator, it cannot be changed. This is because the length of the Style is automatically fixed, depending on the selected section. For example, if you create a Style based on a section of four measures length, the End Mark position is automatically set to the end of the fourth measure, and cannot be changed in the Step Recording display. • Recording channels can be changed in the Song Creator 1-16 tab display; however, they cannot be changed in the Style Creator. Select the recording channel in the BASIC tab display. • In the Style Creator, the channel data can be entered and System Exclusive data can be edited (delete, copy, or move). You can switch between the two by pressing the [F] button. However, Chord, Lyrics, and System Exclusive data cannot be entered. 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – For instructions on Step Recording, refer to pages 50 – 53. For information on the EDIT display (Event List display), refer to page 63. Style Assembly Style Assembly allows you to create a single Style by mixing the various patterns (channels) from existing internal Styles. 1 2 3 Select the desired Style to serve as the basis for recording/editing before calling up the Style Creator display. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [A] STYLE CREATOR → TAB [L][R] ASSEMBLY Select the desired section (Intro, Main, Ending, etc.) for your new Style. First call up the SECTION Selection display by pressing one of the Section buttons (INTRO, MAIN, ENDING, etc.) on the panel. Then change the section as desired by using the [6]/[7] buttons and actually enter the selection by pressing the [8] (OK) button. NOTE You cannot select INTRO 4 and ENDING 4 sections directly via panel operations. 28 CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 Select the channel for which you wish to replace the pattern by using the [A] – [D] and [F] – [I] buttons. Call up the Style Selection display by pressing the same button again. Select the Style containing the pattern you want to replace in the Style Selection display. To return to the previous screen, press the [EXIT] button after selecting the Style. 4 [A] – [D], [F] – [I] buttons 5 5 6 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 6 Select the desired section of the newly imported Style (chosen in step 4) by using the [2]/[3] (SECTION) buttons. Select the desired channel for the section (chosen in step 5) by using the [4]/ [5] (CHANNEL) buttons. Repeat steps 4 – 6 above to replace the patterns of other channels. Playing the Style During Style Assembly While you are assembling a Style, you can play back the Style (to check the sound of your edits) and conveniently select the method of playback. Use the [6]/[7] (PLAY TYPE) buttons in the Style Assembly display to select the playback method. • SOLO Mutes all but the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to ON in the RECORD display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously. • ON Plays back the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. Any channels set to other than OFF in the RECORD display on the BASIC Page are played back simultaneously. • OFF Mutes the selected channel in the ASSEMBLY Page. 7 Press the [J] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 29 Editing the Rhythmic Feel 1 3 2 1 3 1 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – In the GROOVE Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1] – [8] buttons. 1 GROOVE This lets you add swing to the music or change the “feel” of the beat by making subtle shifts in the timing (clock) of the Style. The Groove settings are applied to all channels of the selected Style. 30 [1]/ [2] ORIGINAL BEAT Specifies the beats to which Groove timing is to be applied. In other words, if “8 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to the 8th notes; if “12 Beat” is selected, Groove timing is applied to 8th-note triplets. [3]/ [4] BEAT CONVERTER Actually changes the timing of the beats (specified in the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above) to the selected value. For example, when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “8 Beat” and BEAT CONVERTER is set to “12,” all 8th notes in the section are shifted to 8th-note triplet timing. The “16A” and “16B” Beat Converter which appear when ORIGINAL BEAT is set to “12 Beat” are variations on a basic 16th-note setting. [5]/ [6] SWING Produces a “swing” feel by shifting the timing of the back beats, depending on the ORIGINAL BEAT parameter above. For example, if the specified ORIGINAL BEAT value is “8 Beat”, the Swing parameter will selectively delay the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th beats of each measure to create a swing feel. The settings “A” through “E” produce different degrees of swing, with “A” being the most subtle and “E” being the most pronounced. [7]/ [8] FINE Selects a variety of Groove “templates” to be applied to the selected section. The “PUSH” settings cause certain beats to be played early, while “HEAVY” settings delay the timing of certain beats. The numbered settings (2, 3, 4, 5) determine which beats are to be affected. All beats up to the specified beat — but not including the first beat — will be played early or delayed (for example, the 2nd and 3rd beats, if “3” is selected). In all cases, “A” types produce minimum effect, “B” types produce medium effect, and “C” types produce maximum effect. CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 DYNAMICS This changes the velocity/volume (or accent) of certain notes in the Style playback. The Dynamics settings can be applied individually to each channel or globally to all channels of the selected Style. 3 CHANNEL Selects the desired channel (part) to which Dynamics is to be applied. [3]/ [4] ACCENT TYPE Determines the type of accent applied — in other words, which notes in the part(s) are emphasized with the Dynamics settings. [6] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the selected Accent Type (above) will be applied. The higher the value, the stronger the effect. [7] EXPAND/ COMP. Expands or compresses the range of velocity values. Values higher than 100% expand the dynamic range, while values lower than 100% compress it. [8] BOOST/CUT Boosts or cuts all velocity values in the selected section/channel. Values above 100% boost the overall velocity, while values below 100% reduce it. 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 2 [1]/ [2] Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the Groove or Dynamics results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 31 Editing Data for Each Channel 1 5 4 2 3 1 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu. 1 QUANTIZE Same as in the Song Creator (page 61), with the exception of the two additional available parameters below. Eighth notes with swing Sixteenth notes with swing 2 VELOCITY CHANGE Boosts or cuts the velocity of all notes in the specified channel, according to the percentage specified here. 3 BAR COPY This function allows data to be copied from one measure or group of measures to another location within the specified channel. [4] TOP [5] LAST [6] DEST Specifies the first (TOP) and last (LAST) measures in the region to be copied. Specifies the first measure of the destination location, to which the data is to be copied. 4 BAR CLEAR This function clears all data from the specified range of measures within the selected channel. 5 REMOVE EVENT This function lets you remove specific events from the selected channel. 2 3 4 32 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. Use the [4] – [8] buttons to edit the data. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to actually enter the edits for each display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the results of the edit. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. CVP-701 Reference Manual Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Making Style File Format Settings The Style File Format (SFF) combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment (Style playback) know-how into a single unified format. By using the Style Creator, you can take advantage of the power of the SFF format and freely create your own Styles. The chart shown below indicates the process by which the Style is played back. (This does not apply to the rhythm track.) These parameters can be set via the Style Creator feature, in the PARAMETER Page. 3 Source Pattern settings — SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD (page 34) The Style data is appropriately converted depending on chord changes you make during your performance. You can create the “Source Pattern” with the Style Creator, which determines how the played chord will be converted. Here the “Source Chord” (page 34) can be set, allowing you to record accompaniment channels. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 5 Chord changes via the chord section of the keyboard. Note Transposition settings — NTR and NTT (page 35) This parameter group features two parameters that determine how the notes of the Source Pattern are to be converted in response to chord changes. Other settings — HIGH KEY, NOTE LIMIT and RTR (page 37) Using the parameters of this group, you can fine-tune how Style playback responds to the chords you play. For example, the Note Limit parameter allows you to have the Voices of the Style sound as realistic as possible by shifting the pitch to an authentic range — ensuring that no notes sound outside the natural range of the actual instrument (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). Output This instrument’s Styles are compatible with SFF GE — an enhanced format of the original SFF with especially rich, expressive guitar parts. NOTE The Style files created on this instrument can only be played back on instruments which are compatible with SFF GE. CVP-701 Reference Manual 33 1 In the PARAMETER Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu. For details of the edit menu, see page 34. 1 4 2 3 2 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – 3 4 3 Use the [1]/[2] (CHANNEL) buttons to select the channel to be edited. The selected channel is shown at the upper left of the display. Use the [3] – [8] buttons to edit the data. For details on editable parameters, see pages 34 – 37. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Style will be lost if you change to another Style or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 1 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/CHORD These settings determine the original key of the source pattern (i.e., the key used when recording the pattern). When you change Source Root/Chord from the default CM7 to another chord, the chord notes and recommended notes will also change, depending on the newly selected chord type. When the Source Root is C: C6 CMaj CM 7 ♯ 11 CM 7 CM 7 (9) Cadd 9 C 6 (9) C C R C C R C R C C C R Cm Caug R C R Cm 7 (11) C R C C C C C R C 7 ♭5 C C C C C C C R C C C C C R C C R C R C C R R C C R C C C C 1+5 C C C R C C 7 sus4 C C R C C C C C C 7 ( ♯ 9) C 7 ( ♭ 13) C C C C C C R C C C C R C R C C R C 7 ( ♭ 9) C C C C R C C C Cm 7 (9) C7 C C R C R C Cmadd 9 C C 7 (13) C R C R Cdim 7 C C C R C C 1+8 C 7 aug R C C C C R C Cdim C 7 ♯ 11 C CM 7 aug C R C R C C 7 (9) C R C C C C C C Cm 7 ♭ 5 C R C C CmM 7 (9) R C C R C Cm 7 C C R C R C C R C CmM 7 C C R C Cm 6 C R C R C C R C C C C C R C C R C C C Csus 2 Csus 4 R C C C R C C C C C R C C C C R C R C = Chord notes C, R = Recommended notes NOTE When NTR is set to “Root Fixed,” NTT is set to “Bypass” and NTT BASS is set to “OFF,” the “Source Root” and “Source Chord” parameters are changed to “Play Root” and “Play Chord,” respectively. In this case, you can change chords and hear the resulting sound for all channels. NOTE SOURCE ROOT/CHORD is not applied when NTR is set to GUITAR. 34 CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 NTR/NTT [3]/ [4] NTR (Note Transposition Rule) Determines the relative position of the root note in the chord, when converted from the Source Pattern in response to chord changes. Refer to the list below. [5] – [7] NTT (Note Transposition Table) Sets the note transposition table for the source pattern. Refer to the list below. [8] NTT BASS ON/ OFF The channel for which this is set to ON will be played back by the bass root note, when the on-bass chord is recognized by the instrument. When NTR is set to GUITAR and this parameter is set to ON, only notes assigned to bass will be played back by the bass root note. NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ROOT FIXED GUITAR When the root note is transposed, the interval between notes is maintained. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become F3, A3 and C4 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain melody lines. The note is kept as close as possible to the previous note range. For example, the notes C3, E3 and G3 in the key of C become C3, F3 and A3 when they are transposed to F. Use this setting for channels that contain chord parts. 3 When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. When playing a C major chord. When playing an F major chord. Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – ROOT TRANS (Root Transpose) This is exclusively for transposing guitar accompaniment. Notes are transposed to approximate the chords played with natural guitar fingering. NTT (Note Transposition Table) When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS or ROOT FIXED BYPASS When NTR is set to ROOT FIXED, the transposition table used does not do any note conversion. When NTR is set to ROOT TRANS, the table used only converts the notes by maintaining the pitch relationship between notes. MELODY Suitable for melody line transposition. Use this for melody channels such as Phrase 1 and Phrase 2. CHORD Suitable for chordal parts transposition. Use this for the Chord 1 and Chord 2 channels, especially when they contain piano or guitar-like chordal parts. MELODIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third interval in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third interval is raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for melody channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. MELODIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Melodic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th intervals of the Source Pattern. CVP-701 Reference Manual 35 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – HARMONIC MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and sixth intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted sixth intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to major/minor chords, such as Intros and Endings. HARMONIC MINOR 5th In addition to the Harmonic Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. NATURAL MINOR When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third, sixth and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third, flatted sixth and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. NATURAL MINOR 5th In addition to the Natural Minor transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. DORIAN When the played chord changes from a major to a minor chord, this table lowers the third and seventh intervals in the scale by a semitone. When the chord changes from a minor to a major chord, the minor third and flatted seventh intervals are raised by a semitone. Other notes are not changed. Use this for chord channels of Sections which respond only to a major/minor chord such as Intros and Endings. DORIAN 5th In addition to the Dorian transposition above, augmented and diminished chords affect the 5th note of the Source pattern. When NTR is set to GUITAR 36 ALL-PURPOSE This table covers both strummed- and arpeggio-played sound. STROKE Suitable for strumming sounds of the guitar. Some notes may sound as if they are muted—this is the normal condition when chords are played on guitar by strumming. ARPEGGIO Suitable for arpeggio-played sound of the guitar. Using this table, four notes arpeggio sounds most beautiful. CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 HIGH KEY / NOTE LIMIT [4]/ [5] HIGH KEY This sets the highest key (upper octave limit) of the note transposition for the chord root change. Any notes calculated to be higher than the highest key are transposed down to the next lowest octave. This setting is effective only when the NTR parameter (page 35) is set to “Root Trans.” Example — When the highest key is F NOTE LIMIT LOW [7] NOTE LIMIT HIGH CM Notes played C3-E3-G3 C♯ M ♯ C 3-F3-G ♯ 3 FM F3-A3-C4 F♯ M ♯ F 2-A ♯ 2-C ♯ 3 These set the note range (highest and lowest notes) for Voices recorded to the Style channels. By judicious setting of this range, you can ensure that the Voices sound as realistic as possible — in other words, that no notes outside the natural range are sounded (e.g., high bass sounds or low piccolo sounds). 3 Styles – Playing Rhythm and Accompaniment – [6] Root changes Example — When the lowest note is C3 and the highest is D4 Root changes CM Notes played E3-G3-C4 C♯ M F3-G ♯ 3-C ♯ 4 FM F3-A3-C4 High Limit Low Limit 4 RTR (Retrigger Rule) These settings determine whether notes stop sounding or not and how they change pitch in response to chord changes. STOP The notes stop sounding. PITCH SHIFT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the type of the new chord. PITCH SHIFT TO ROOT The pitch of the note will bend without a new attack to match the root of the new chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. RETRIGGER The note is retriggered with a new attack at a new pitch corresponding to the next chord. RETRIGGER TO ROOT The note is retriggered with a new attack at the root note of the next chord. However, the octave of the new note remains the same. CVP-701 Reference Manual 37 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – Contents Editing Music Notation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function) . . .41 • Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 • Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 4 Editing Music Notation Settings Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – To view the music notation of the selected Song, press the [SCORE] button. You can change the notation display as desired to suit your personal preferences. The settings here are maintained even when the power is turned off. NOTE You can save the setting here as a part of a Song by accessing [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB[L][R] SETUP. See page 59. 38 [1] LEFT ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the left-hand key range. Depending on other settings, this parameter may be unavailable and may appear grayed out. If this is the case, go to the detailed setting display (on page 39) and set the LEFT CH. parameter to any channel except “AUTO.” Or, go to the display [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] GUIDE/ CHANNEL and set the TRACK 2 parameter to any channel except “OFF” (page 41). RIGHT (next parameter) and LEFT cannot be turned off at the same time. [2] RIGHT ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the right-hand key range. RIGHT and LEFT (above) cannot be turned off at the same time. [3] CHORD ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the chords. If the selected Song does not contain chord data, chords are not displayed. CVP-701 Reference Manual [4] LYRICS ON/OFF Enables/disables display of the lyrics. If the selected Song does not contain lyric data, lyrics are not displayed. When the Song contains Pedal events, pressing these buttons can display the Pedal events, instead of displaying Lyrics. [5] NOTE ON/ OFF Enables/disables display of the note name (pitch). The note name is indicated at the left of the note. When the space between the notes is too small, the indication may be moved to the top left of the note. When the Song contains Fingering events, pressing these buttons can display the fingering, instead of displaying note names. [6] COLOR NOTE When this is set to ON, the notes in the display are color-coded (C: red, D: yellow, E: green, F: orange, G: blue, A: purple, and B: gray). [7] SIZE Determines the display resolution (or zoom level) of the notation. [8] SET UP See below. Pressing the [8] (SET UP) button calls up the detailed setting display. You can set the view type by using the [1] – [6] buttons, then press the [8] (OK) button. LEFT CH [2] RIGHT CH Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – [1] 4 Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is used for the left-hand/righthand part. This setting returns to AUTO when a different Song is selected. AUTO The MIDI channels in the Song data for the right- and left-hand parts are assigned automatically — setting the parts to the same channel as the channel which is specified in [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] GUIDE/CHANNEL (page 41). 1 – 16 Assigns the specified MIDI channel (1 – 16) to the respective left- or right-hand parts. OFF (LEFT CH only) No channel assignment. This disables display of the left-hand key range. [3]/ [4] KEY SIGNATURE This lets you enter key signature changes in the middle of a Song, at the stopped position. This setting is useful for Songs you've recorded with key changes, so the key signature changes are properly reflected in the notation. [5] QUANTIZE This gives you control over the note resolution in the notation, letting you shift or correct the timing of all displayed notes so that they line up to a particular note value. Make sure to select the smallest note value used in the Song. CVP-701 Reference Manual 39 [6] NOTE NAME Selects the type of the note name indicated at the left of the note in the notation from among the following three types. The settings here are available when the NOTE ON/OFF parameter above is set to ON. A, B, C Note names are indicated as letters (C, D, E, F, G, A, B). Fixed DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio and differ depending on the selected language. Movable DO Note names are indicated in solfeggio according to the scale intervals, and as such are relative to the key. The root note is indicated as Do. For example, in the key of G major the root note of “Sol” would be indicated as “Do.” As with “Fixed Do,” the indication differs depending on the selected language. 4 Using the Auto Accompaniment Features with Song Playback Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, channels 9-16 in the Song data are replaced with Style channels – allowing you to play the accompaniment parts of the Song yourself. Try playing chords along with the Song playback as shown in the instructions below. When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, we recommend that you use the Preset Songs in the “Sing-a-long” folder. 1 Select a Song. 2 Select a Style. 3 4 5 6 Press the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn on the Auto Accompaniment function. Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button to enable standby — letting you simultaneously start the accompaniment as soon as you start playing. While holding down the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button, press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to enable synchronized start for the Song. Press the STYLE [START/STOP] button or play chords with your left hand. The Song and Style starts playing. When you play chords, pressing the [SCORE] button and turning CHORD on (page 38) allows you to see the chord information. NOTE When playing back a Song and a Style at the same time, the tempo value set in the Song is automatically used. When Song playback is stopped, the Style playback is also stopped at the same time. 40 CVP-701 Reference Manual Song Playback Related Parameters (Repeat settings, Channel settings, Guide Function) The instrument has a variety of Song playback functions — Repeat playback, various Guide settings, etc. — which can be accessed in the display below. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING Select the desired page, GUIDE/CHANNEL or OTHERS, by using the TAB [L][R] buttons. Detailed settings for playback, such as Repeat mode, can be set in the OTHERS page of the Song Setting display. 4 Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 1  GUIDE/CHANNEL Page [A]/[B] GUIDE MODE See page 43. [C] GUIDE LAMP [D] GUIDE LAMP TIMING [I] PHRASE MARK REPEAT Phrase Mark is a pre-programmed part of some Song data, which specifies a certain location (set of measures) in the Song. When this is on, the section corresponding to the specified Phrase Mark number is repeatedly played back. [2]/ [3] TRACK 2 These parameters determine which MIDI channel in the Song data is assigned to the Left- or Right-hand part of the Guide function and the Song Score function. [4]/ [5] TRACK 1 [6]/ [7] AUTO CH SET When set to “ON,” this automatically sets the proper MIDI channels for the Right- and Left hand parts pre-programmed in the commercially available Song data. Normally, this should be set to “ON.” CVP-701 Reference Manual 41  OTHERS Page [G] REPEAT MODE Determines the method of repeat playback. OFF Plays through the selected Song, then stops. SINGLE Plays through the selected Song repeatedly. ALL Continues playback through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly. RANDOM Continues playback at random through all the Songs in the specified folder repeatedly. NOTE The preset Songs in the “Follow Lights” folder contain the Guide settings. These Songs are inap- propriate for use with ALL or RANDOM repeat. 4 [H] CHORD DETECTION PRIORITY Determines the priority of the chords for accompaniment, either the ones contained in the MIDI Song being played back or the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard. Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – • MIDI SONG: Gives priority to the chords contained in the MIDI Song. • KEYBOARD: Gives priority to the chords you play in the chord section of the keyboard. Set this if you want to practice playing chords with MIDI Song playback. Once you play in the chord section during MIDI Song playback, the instrument ignores the chords contained in the MIDI Song until the playback ends. [I] FAST FORWARD TYPE Determines the fast forward type of when pressing [FF] button during MIDI Song playback. • Jump: Pressing [FF] button once instantly sets the playback position to the next measure without sounding. Holding [FF] button scrolls forward continuously. • Scrub: Pressing and holding [FF] button plays and sounds the MIDI Song at high speed. In the following cases, fast forwarding through a MIDI Song functions as the Jump type even if Scrub is selected. • When MIDI Clock is set to External • When the MIDI Song is fast-forwarded by Phrase marks NOTE Pressing [FF] button during while a MIDI Song is stopped functions as the Jump type. [2]/ [3] LYRICS LANGUAGE Determines the language of the displayed lyrics. AUTO When the language is specified in the Song data, the lyrics are displayed accordingly. When the language is not specified in the Song data, the lyrics language is regarded as INTERNATIONAL below. INTERNATIONAL Handles the displayed lyrics as a western language. JAPANESE Handles the displayed lyrics as Japanese. 42 CVP-701 Reference Manual [4]/ [5] QUICK START On some commercially available Song data, certain settings related to the Song (such as Voice selection, volume, etc.) are recorded to the first measure, before the actual note data. When Quick Start is set to “ON,” the instrument reads all initial non-note data of the Song at the highest possible speed, then automatically switches to the appropriate tempo at the first note. This allows you to start playback as quickly as possible, with a minimum pause for reading of data. [6]/ [7] P.A.T. See page 45. Keyboard Practice Using the Guide Function The keyboard guide lamps indicate the notes (location and timing) for you to play. 2 3 4 Select the desired Song for practicing the keyboard or singing. Call up the setting display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] GUIDE/CHANNEL Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 1 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the desired Guide function type. Guide menu for keyboard practice • Follow Lights With this function, the keyboard guide lamps indicate which notes you should play. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play. When you play the correct notes, Song playback continues. • Any Key With this function, you can play the melody of a Song just by pressing a single key (any key is OK) in time with the rhythm. Song playback pauses and waits for you to play any key. Simply play a key on the keyboard in time with the music and Song playback continues. • Your Tempo The same as Follow Lights, except that Song playback matches the speed at which you play. Guide menu for singing • Karao-Key This function lets you control the Song playback timing with just one finger, while you sing along. This is useful for singing to your own performance. Song playback pauses, waiting for you to sing. Simply play a key on the keyboard (any key is fine) and Song playback continues. CVP-701 Reference Manual 43 4 Turn the [GUIDE] button on. 5 Call up the Score display by pressing the [SCORE] button. 6 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Practice playing the keyboard or singing, along with the Guide type selected in step 3. NOTE The guide lamps light according to Song channels recorded to Track 1 and 2 and the chord data in the Song (when such data is included). If the guide lamps do not light as intended, you may need to assign the appropriate right- and left-hand channels to Track 1 and 2 respectively (page 41). 7 4 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback. Determining the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light (GUIDE LAMP TIMING) Press the [D] button in the SONG SETTING display in step 3 to select the timing by which the keyboard guide lamps light. Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – • JUST The guide lamps light in time with the music, at the same timing you should play. • NEXT The guide lamps light slightly ahead of the music, indicating the notes you should play next. The guide lamps flash if you fail to play the keys with the correct timing. NOTE If you want to turn the guide lamps off, press the [C] (GUIDE LAMP) button in the SONG SETTING display (in step 3 as described above). NOTE You can save the Guide settings as a part of the Song data (page 59). For Songs to which the Guide settings have been saved, the Guide function will be automatically turned on and the related settings will be recalled when the Song is selected. 44 CVP-701 Reference Manual Playing Backing Parts with the Performance Assistant Technology This feature lets you play your own backing parts on the keyboard along with Song playback, and have them sound perfectly appropriate (even though you might be playing wrong notes). 2 3 4 5 Select a Song containing chord data. The Performance Assistant Technology applies only to Songs containing chord data. To confirm whether the selected Song contains chord data or not, return to the Main display, then start playback. If the current Song contains chord data, the Main display shows the current chord type. After stopping playback, go to the next step. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [H] SONG SETTING → TAB [L][R] OTHERS Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. (Performance Assistant Technology) on. 4 Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the keyboard. Along with Song playback, try playing a bass line in the left hand area while playing various phrases or chords in the right hand area. Even if you do not know what notes should be played, don’t worry and play any keys as desired! Only the harmonically “correct” notes matching the current chord are sounded, regardless of the notes you actually play. Song Playback – Playing and Practicing Songs – 1 Current chord 6 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop playback. 7 Press the [6]/[7] button to turn the P.A.T. off. NOTE Selecting another Song may reset P.A.T. to OFF. CVP-701 Reference Manual 45 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Contents Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 • Recording a Style Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 • Recording a Melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 • Saving the Recorded Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 • Recording Melodies (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 • Recording Chords (Step Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 • Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 • Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 • Editing Channel Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 • Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Recording Style Playback First, Then Melodies Here, you will learn how to record a style to channels 9 – 16 first and then a melody to channel 1 in a realtime recording. The instructions hereafter assume the following panel settings as an example. Before starting recording, make the panel settings as follows; • Turn the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT1] button on, and then select the desired voice of the RIGHT1 part. • Turn the [LEFT] and [RIGHT2] parts off. • Select the desired Style. • Set the Fingering Type to “MULTI FINGER” (default setting): [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [A] SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING → TAB [L][R] CHORD FINGERING Recording a Style Performance 1 46 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song for recording is automatically set. CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 Specify the target channel and part for recording. 2-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] – [8] buttons to specify the desired channels (9 – 16) for recording. As the default setting, Style parts (Rythm1-Phrase 2) are assigned to channels 9 – 16 as illustrated on page 49. You can change the parts to be recorded by performing step 2-2. 2-2 2-1 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 2-2 Select the desired part which will be recorded to the channel specified in step 2-1 by using the [C]/[D] buttons. NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button. 3 Press the STYLE [SYNC START] button, then play the style by specifying the chords in the chord section. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play the Style. You can also start recording by pressing SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Perform as desired, playing the Style by changing chords and/ or sections. Chord section Split Point (F ♯ 2 as default) NOTE Make sure that the STYLE [ACMP ON/OFF] button is turned on. 4 5 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop recording. To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This finishes recording of the Style. Now, let’s record a melody to channel 1. CVP-701 Reference Manual 47 Recording a Melody 6 Specify the target channel and part for recording. 6-1 While holding down the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the [1] button to specify channel 1 for recording. 6-2 Select “RIGHT1” by using the [C]/[D] buttons. NOTICE Previously recorded data will be overwritten if you set channels which have recorded data to “REC.” NOTE To cancel the recording, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button. 7 Play a melody. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard, or when you press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. You can play a melody while listening to the already recorded Style performance. 5 When recording another channel, you can turn already recorded channels on or off in the display. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 8 After you finish your performance, press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to stop recording. 9 To hear the recorded performance, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. This finishes recording of the Style and the melody. Now, let’s save the recorded performance as a file (below). Saving the Recorded Performance 10 Save the recorded performance as a file. Press the [SONG SELECT] button to call up the Song Selection display. The recorded performance will be saved as a file in the Song Selection display. For the following instructions, see “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song will be lost if you change to another Song or you turn the power off without executing the Save operation. 48 CVP-701 Reference Manual Creating/Editing Songs (Song Creator) The Owner’s Manual covers how to create an original Song by recording your keyboard performance (called “Realtime Recording”). This Reference Manual shows how to create an original Song by entering notes one by one (called “Step Recording”) and how to improve an already created Song by editing the detailed parameters.  Realtime Recording and Step Recording When creating a Song, these two Recording methods are available. With Realtime Recording, this instrument records the performance data as it is played. With Step Recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This chapter primarily covers the instructions for Step Recording.  MIDI Song Data Structure A MIDI Song consists of 16 MIDI channels. You can create data of a MIDI Song by recording your performance to a specific channel or channels in realtime, or by executing Step Recording. Recording Part (Default settings) Channel 1 Right 1 Channel 2 Left Keyboard Performance Channel 3 Right 2 • Realtime Recording: Channel 4 — Channel 5 — Channel 6 — Channel 7 — Channel 8 — Channel 9 Rhythm 1 Channel 10 Rhythm 2 Channel 11 Bass Style Playback Channel 12 Chord 1 • Realtime Recording: Channel 13 Chord 2 Channel 14 Pad Channel 15 Phrase 1 Channel 16 Phrase 2 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Song By default, your keyboard performance will be recorded to MIDI channels 1 – 3. You can also record additional performances to channels 4 – 8. • Step Recording: Without specifying the keyboard part, you can input melodies or notes one by one to the desired channel. By default, Style playback will be recorded to MIDI channels 9 – 16. • Step Recording: After inputting the Chord change/Section change events, touch [Expand] to actually record the note data to MIDI channels 9 – 16. System Exclusive Lyrics CVP-701 Reference Manual 49  Song Creator Display Structure The Song Creator can be called up via [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR. 1 2 There are several Pages (tabs) in the Song Creator display. • REC MODE For re-recording the Song. See page 57. 5 • SETUP For selecting the panel setups to be recorded to the top position of the Song. See page 59. • CHANNEL For editing the Channel events. See page 60. • CHORD For recording the Chords and Sections with timing (page 54) or editing them (page 64). • 1-16 For recording the melodies (Step Recording; see below) or editing them (page 64). • SYS/EX. For editing the System Exclusive events (tempo, time signature, etc.). See page 64. • LYRICS For inputting/editing the Song name and lyrics. See page 65. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Recording Melodies (Step Recording) 1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings. 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] 1-16 3 4 50 3 Press the [F] button to select the channel for recording. 4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. CVP-701 Reference Manual Start Step Recording by using the [A] – [J] buttons and [1] – [8] buttons, as well as the keyboard. Refer to the example on page 52 for specific instructions. When a note is input, the location (bar: beat: clock), note name, velocity and length are shown as a list. [A]/[B]/[C] Moves the cursor in the list. [G] Determines the velocity (loudness) of the note to be entered. The velocity value can be specified within a range from 1 to 127. The higher the velocity value, the louder the sound becomes. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 Kbd.Vel: Actual resulting velocity fff: 127 ff: 111 f: 95 mf: 79 mp: 63 p: 47 pp: 31 ppp:15 [H] Determines the gate time (note length) of the note to be entered. Normal: 80% Tenuto: 99% Staccato: 40% Staccatissimo: 20% Manual: The gate time can be set to any desired percentage by using the [DATA ENTRY] dial. [I] Determines the note type to be entered: normal, dotted or triplet. [J] DELETE Deletes the selected data. [1] BAR Sets the position of the note to be entered. [2] BEAT [3] CLK [4] – [8] Determines the note length to be entered: whole-note, half-note, quarter-note, eighth-note or sixteenth-note. CVP-701 Reference Manual 51 Example of Step Recording — Melodies 1 2 3 4 * The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to the following operation step numbers. In this example, keep in mind that one of the steps involves holding down a key on the keyboard while executing the operation. Select the Voice for recording after calling up the Step Recording display. NOTE Since the music score displayed on the instrument is generated from the recorded MIDI data, it may not appear exactly the same as shown here. NOTE The illustration given here is just a sample for entering. Non-note musical performance symbols will not be shown in the Score display, even if you've entered them. 1 5 Enter the first and second notes with a slur. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 Press the [G] button to select “f.” Press the [H] button to select “Ten.” (Tenuto). Press the [I] button to select the dotted note type. Select the dotted quarter-note by using the [6] buttons. Play the C3 key. The first note is entered. 1-6 Press the [I] button to select the “normal” note type. 1-7 Press the [7] button to select the eighth-note length. 1-8 Play the D3 key. The second note is entered. 2 Enter the next notes and apply staccato. 2-1 Press the [H] button to select “Sta.” (Staccato). There are two Staccato settings; choose the “40%” setting. 2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length. 2-3 Play the keys E3 and F3 in order. The first measure has been completed. 3 52 To enter a quarter-note rest, press the [6] button again. To enter the rest, use the [4] – [8] buttons. (Press the button once to select the rest value, and once again to actually enter it.) A rest having the specified note length will be entered. CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 Enter the next notes and apply a tie. 4-1 Press the [G] button to select “mP.” 4-2 Press the [H] button to select “Nrm.” (Normal). 4-3 While holding G3 key on the keyboard, press the [6] button. Do not release the G3 key yet. Keep holding it while executing the following steps. 4-4 While holding the G3 key, press the C4 key. Do not release the G3 and C4 keys yet. Keep holding the notes while executing the following step. 4-5 While holding the keys G3 and C4, press the [5] button. After pressing the button, release the keys. 6 7 5 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then hear the newly entered Song by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 53 Recording Chords (Step Recording) You can record Chords and Sections (Intro, Main, Ending, and so on) one at a time with precise timing. These instructions show how to record chord changes using the Step Record function. 1 Press the SONG CONTROL [REC] and SONG CONTROL [STOP] buttons simultaneously. A blank Song (“New Song”) is called up for recording. NOTE Selecting a blank Song initializes the panel settings. 2 3 5 Select the Style you want to use in the Song. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] CHORD Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 4 Press the [G] (STEP REC) button to call up the STEP RECORD display. 5 Now, go on to the next section and start Step Recording. For information on these buttons, refer to page 51. 54 CVP-701 Reference Manual Example of Step Recording — Chords NOTE This example uses a Style in 4/4 time. C 1 2 3 MAIN A BREAK MAIN B F G F G7 * The numbers shown in the illustration correspond to the respective operation step numbers below. C Before starting, make sure the [AUTO FILL IN] button is set to off since no Fill in is included in the notation example above. 1 Enter the chords for the Main A section. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN A] button. 1-2 Press the [5] button to select the half-note length. 1-3 Play the chord C, F and G in the chord section of the keyboard. C F G 1-2 1-1 1-3 2 Enter the chords for the Break section. 2-1 Press the STYLE [BREAK] button. 2-2 Press the [6] button to select the quarter-note length. 2-3 Play the chords F and G7 in the chord section of the keyboard. F G7 2-1 2-2 2-3 NOTE To enter fill-ins, turn the [AUTO FILL IN] button to ON, and simply press the desired MAIN VARIATION [A] – [D] button. CVP-701 Reference Manual 55 3 Enter the chords for the Main B section. 3-1 Press the STYLE [MAIN B] button. 3-2 Press the [4] button to select the whole-note length. 3-3 Play the chord C in the chord section of the keyboard. C 3-1 4 3-2 3-3 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button (or press the [C] button) to return to the top of the Song, then press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to hear the newly entered Song. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 6 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Step Recording display. Press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the input chord change data into the Song data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 56 CVP-701 Reference Manual Re-recording a Specific Section — Punch In/Out When re-recording a specific section of an already-recorded Song, use the Punch IN/OUT function. In this method, only the data between the Punch In point and the Punch Out point is overwritten with the newly recorded data. Keep in mind that the notes before and after the Punch In/Out points are not recorded over, although you will hear them play back normally to guide you in and out of the Punch In/Out timing. 2 3 Select the Song you want to re-record. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] REC MODE Determine the settings for recording. 5 [1] – [3] REC START (Punch In) Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1 Determines the recording start behavior. NORMAL Overwrite recording starts when pressing the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button or when you play the keyboard in the Synchro Standby mode. FIRST KEY ON The Song plays back normally, then starts overwrite recording as soon as you play the keyboard. PUNCH IN AT The Song plays back normally up to the beginning of the indicated Punch In measure, then starts overwrite recording at that point. You can set the Punch In measure by pressing the [3] button. [4] – [6] REC END (Punch Out) Determines the recording stop behavior, or how data is handled after recording is stopped. REPLACE ALL This deletes all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT The Song position at which recording is stopped is regarded as the Punch Out point. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. PUNCH OUT AT Actual overwrite recording continues until the beginning of the specified Punch Out measure (set with the corresponding display button), at which point recording stops and normal playback continues. This setting maintains all data after the point at which recording is stopped. You can set the Punch Out measure by pressing the [6] buttons. CVP-701 Reference Manual 57 [7]/ [8] PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT When this is set to ON, you can use the center pedal to control the Punch In and Punch Out points. While a Song is playing back, pressing (and holding) the center pedal instantly enables Punch In recording, while releasing the pedal stops recording (Punch Out). You can press and release the center pedal as often as you want during playback to punch in/out of overwrite recording. Note that the current function assignment of the center pedal is cancelled when the Pedal Punch In/Out function is set to ON. NOTE Pedal Punch In/Out operation may be reversed depending on the particular pedal you’ve con- nected to the instrument. If necessary, change the pedal polarity to reverse the control (page 89). 4 5 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 6 While holding the SONG CONTROL [REC] button, press the desired track button. Press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start Punch In/Out recording. Play the keyboard at the Punch In point and stop recording at the Punch Out point. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation.  Examples of re-recording with various Punch In/Out settings This instrument features several different ways you use the Punch In/Out function. The illustrations below indicate a variety of situations in which selected measures in an eight-measure phrase are re-recorded. REC START setting REC END setting Original data 1 2 3 4 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL REPLACE ALL 1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT AT 006 1 2 3 4 1 FIRST KEY ON REPLACE ALL FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT FIRST KEY ON PUNCH OUT AT 006 PUNCH IN AT 003 REPLACE ALL Play back original data 1 Play back original data 1 Play back original data 1 1 Play back original data PUNCH IN AT 003 PUNCH OUT AT 006 58 3 4 1 CVP-701 Reference Manual 8 5 *1 To avoid overwriting measures 1 – 2, start recording from measure 3. *2 To stop recording, press the [REC] button at the end of measure 5. Deleted 5 6 7 8 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data 2 3 4 2 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 Deleted Stop recording *2 4 5 6 7 8 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 Deleted Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop overwrite recording/ play original data Start overwrite recording 2 6 Stop recording *2 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 2 5 Stop recording *2 4 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording Play back original data PUNCH IN AT 003 PUNCH OUT 2 Play the keyboard to start overwrite recording 1 7 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 Play back original data 6 Stop recording *2 Start overwrite recording *1 NORMAL PUNCH OUT 5 4 5 6 7 8 Previously recorded data Newly recorded data Deleted data Changing the Setup Parameters Recorded to the Song The current settings of the Mixing Console display and other panel settings can be recorded to the top position of the Song as the Setup data. The Mixing Console and panel settings recorded here are automatically recalled when the Song starts. 2 3 4 Select the Song to which you want to record the Setup data. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R]MENU 2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB[L][R] SETUP 5 Press the SONG CONTROL [STOP] button to move the Song position to the top of the Song. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 1 Determine the Setup data to be recorded. [1] – [4] SELECT Determines which playback features and functions will be automatically called up along with the selected Song. The items selected here can be recorded only to the top position of the Song, except for the KEYBOARD VOICE. VOICE, VOLUME, PAN, FILTER, EFFECT, TEMPO, EQ Records the tempo setting and all settings made from the Mixing Console. KEYBOARD VOICE Records the panel settings, including the Voice selection of the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT) and their on/off status. Panel settings recorded here are same as the ones memorized to the One Touch Setting. This can be recorded at any point in a Song. SCORE SETTING Records the settings in the Score display. GUIDE SETTING Records the settings of the Guide functions including the Guide ON/ OFF setting. LYRICS SETTING Records the settings in the Lyrics display. MIC SETTING Records the microphone settings in the MIC SETTING display. [5]/ [6] MARK ON/OFF For adding or removing checkmarks to/from the selected item. Checked items are recorded to the Song. [7]/ [8] APPLY For recording the checked item to the top position of the Song. CVP-701 Reference Manual 59 5 6 Press one of the [7]/[8] (APPLY) buttons to record the data. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The edited Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without carrying out the Save operation. Editing Channel Events You can apply various useful functions to already recorded data, such as Quantize and Transpose, on the CHANNEL page. 3 4 5 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 3 1 2 3 4 5 Select a Song to be edited. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [B] SONG CREATOR → TAB [L][R] CHANNEL In the CHANNEL Page, use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the edit menu, then edit the data by using the [1] – [8] buttons. For details of the edit menu and available settings, see page 61. Press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation for the current display. After the operation is completed, this button changes to “UNDO,” letting you restore the original data if you are not satisfied with the operation results. The Undo function only has one level; only the previous operation can be undone. Press the [I] (SAVE) button, then follow the Save operation steps. For details, refer to “Saving Files” in the Owner’s Manual. NOTICE The recorded Song data will be lost if you select another Song or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. 60 CVP-701 Reference Manual 1 QUANTIZE The Quantize function allows you to align the timing of all the notes in a channel. For example, if you record the musical phrase shown below, you may not play it with absolute precision, and your performance may have been slightly ahead of or behind the precise timing. Quantize is a convenient way to correct for this. [2]/ [3] CHANNEL Determines which MIDI channel in the Song data is to be quantized. [4] – [6] SIZE Selects the quantize size (resolution). For optimum results, you should set the Quantize size to the shortest note value in the channel. For example, if eighth notes are the shortest in the channel, you should use 1/8 note as the Quantize size. 5 After 1/8 note quantization 1/4 note 1/8 note 1/16 note 1/32 note 1/16 note+ 1/8 note triplet* 1/4 note triplet 1/8 note triplet 1/16 note triplet 1/8 note+ 1/8 note triplet* 1/16 note+ 1/16 note triplet* Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Settings: The three Quantize settings marked with asterisks (*) are exceptionally convenient, since they allow you to quantize two different note values at the same time. For example, when the straight eighth notes and eighth notes triplet are contained in the same channel, if you quantize by the straight eighth notes, all notes in the channel are quantized to straight eighth notes — completely eliminating any triplet feel. However, if you use the eighth note + eighth note triplet setting, both the straight and triplet notes will be quantized correctly. [7]/ [8] STRENGTH Determines how strongly the notes will be quantized. A setting of 100% produces exact timing. If a value less than 100% is selected, notes will be moved toward the specified quantization beats according to the specified percentage. Applying less than 100% quantization lets you preserve some of the “human” feel in the recording. Quarter-note length Original data (assuming 4/4 meter) Quantizing strength = 100 Quantizing strength = 50 2 DELETE You can delete the data of the specified channel in the Song. Select the channel whose data is to be deleted by using the [1] – [8] buttons, then press the [D] (EXECUTE) button to execute the operation. CVP-701 Reference Manual 61 3 MIX This function lets you mix the data of two channels and place the results in a different channel. It also lets you copy the data from one channel to another. [2]/ [3] SOURCE 1 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. All MIDI events of the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. [4]/ [5] SOURCE 2 Determines the MIDI channel (1 – 16) to be mixed. Only note events of the channel specified here are copied to the destination channel. Besides the values 1 – 16, there is a “COPY” setting that allows you to copy the data from Source 1 to the destination channel. [6]/ [7] DESTINATION Determines the channel into which the mix or copy results will be placed. 4 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE This allows you to transpose the recorded data of individual channels up or down by a maximum of two octaves in semitone increments. NOTE Make sure not to transpose channels 9 and 10. In general, Drum kits are assigned to these channels. If you transpose the channels of Drum kits, the 5 instruments assigned to each key will be changed. Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 62 [F] CH 1–8/CH 9–16 Toggles between the two channel displays: Channels 1–8, and Channels 9–16. [G] ALL CH To simultaneously set all channels to the same value, adjust the Channel Transpose for one of the channels while holding down this button. CVP-701 Reference Manual Editing Chord Events, Notes, System Exclusive Events and Lyrics You can edit chord events, note events, System Exclusive events and lyrics in the same manner on the corresponding display: CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. and LYRICS. These displays are called “Event List display” because some events are shown in a list view. Event List display Indicates the location (position) of the corresponding event. Indicates the event value. Indicates the event type. See page 64. Moves the cursor up/down and select the desired event. [C] Moves the cursor to the top (beginning of the Song). [D]/[E] Moves the cursor left/right and select the desired parameter of the highlighted event. [H] FILTER Calls up the Filter display (page 65), letting you select only the events you wish to be shown in the event list. [I] SAVE Press to save the edited Song. [J] MULTI SEL. Holding this button while using the [A]/[B] buttons lets you select multiple events. [1] BAR Determines the position (bar/beat/clock) of the data. One clock is equal to 1/1920th of a quarter note. [2] BEAT [3] CLK [4]/ [5] DATA ENTRY Adjusts the event value. For coarse adjustment, use the [4] buttons. For fine adjustment, use the [5] buttons or [DATA ENTRY] dial. [6] CUT Executes the cut/copy/delete/paste operation. [7] COPY [7] DELETE [8] PASTE [6] INS (INSERT) Adds a new event. [8] CANCEL Cancels editing and restores the original value. 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – [A]/[B] NOTE After you edit events in the CHORD tab display, press the [F] (EXPAND) button to convert the data into Song data. NOTE Chord section data recorded with Realtime Recording cannot be indicated and edited on the Event List displays. CVP-701 Reference Manual 63  Chord Events (CHORD Page) Style Style Tempo Tempo Chord Chord root, Chord type, On Bass Chord Sect Style Section (Intro, Main, Fill In, Break, Ending) OnOff On/off status for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style CH.Vol Volume for each part (channel) of the Accompaniment Style S.Vol Overall volume of the Accompaniment Style  Note Events (1-16 Page) 5 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – Note An individual note within a Song. Includes the note number which corresponds to the key which was played, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is played, and the gate time value (the length of a note). Ctrl (Control Change) Settings to control the Voice, such as volume, pan, filter and effect depth (edited via the Mixing Console described in chapter 9), etc. Prog (Program Change) MIDI program change number for selecting a Voice. P.Bnd (Pitch Bend) Data for changing the pitch of a Voice continuously. A.T. (Aftertouch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Note that the keyboard of this instrument does not feature Aftertouch.  System Exclusive Events (SYS/EX. Page) 64 ScBar (Score Start Bar) Determines the top measure of a Song. Tempo Determines the tempo value. Time (Time signature) Determines the time signature. Key (Key signature) Determines the key signature, as well as the major/minor setting, for the music score shown on the display. XGPrm (XG parameters) Allows you to make various detailed changes to the XG parameters. Refer to the “MIDI Data Format” in the MIDI Reference downloadable from the Yamaha Manual Library. SYS/EX. (System Exclusive) Displays the System Exclusive data in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. Meta (Meta event) Displays the SMF meta events in the Song. Keep in mind that you cannot create new data or change the contents of the data here; however, you can delete, cut, copy, and paste the data. CVP-701 Reference Manual  Lyrics Events (LYRICS Page) Name Allows you to enter the Song name. Lyrics Allows you to enter lyrics. Code CR: Enters a line break in the lyrics text. LF: Clears the currently displayed lyrics and displays the next set of lyrics. Displaying Specific Types of Events In the Event List displays, various types of events are shown. It may sometimes be difficult to pinpoint the ones you want to edit. This is where the Filter function comes in handy. It lets you determine which event types will be shown in the Event List displays. 1 2 Press the [H] (FILTER) button in the CHORD, 1-16, SYS/EX. or LYRICS displays. Checkmark the desired item to be displayed. [C] MAIN Displays all main types of events. [D] CTRL. CHG Displays all specific Control Change message events. [E] STYLE Displays all types of Style playback related events. [H] ALL ON Checkmarks all event types. [I] NOTE/ALL OFF/ CHORD “NOTE” or “CHORD” selects only NOTE/CHORD data. “ALL OFF” removes all checkmarks. [J] INVERT Reverses the checkmark settings for all boxes. In other words, this enters checkmarks to all boxes that were previously unchecked and vice versa. [2] – [5] 3 Song Recording via MIDI – Recording Your Performance via MIDI – 5 Selects an event type to be checked or unchecked. [6]/ [7] MARK ON [6]/ [7] MARK OFF Enters/removes the checkmark for the selected event type. The checked event types can be shown on the CHORD, 116, SYS/EX. or LYRICS Page. Press the [EXIT] button to execute the settings. CVP-701 Reference Manual 65 USB Audio Player/Recorder – Playback and Recording Audio Files – This function is fully explained in the Owner’s Manual. Refer to the corresponding chapter in the Owner’s Manual. Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – Contents Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 6 • Saving the Microphone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 • VOCAL Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 • TALK Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – Making and Saving the Microphone Settings (Vocal/Talk) This section lets you set parameters for various Effects that are applied to the microphone sound. You should make both “Vocal” and “Talk” settings — “Vocal,” for your singing performance, and “Talk,” for making announcements between songs, for example. 1 2 3 Connect the microphone to the instrument, then call up the MIC SETTING display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [F] MIC SETTING Press the [F] button to turn the MIC on. This lets you talk into the microphone and hear the changes made while setting the parameters. Select the desired page, VOCAL or TALK, by using the TAB [L][R] buttons. VOCAL page 1 2 TALK page 1 2 1 MIC ON/OFF Turns the microphone sound on or off. 2 TALK ON/OFF Switches the microphone setup between the Vocal setup (for singing and normal performance) and Talk setup (for making announcements or talking between songs). When set to ON, only the Talk settings are active. When set to OFF, only the Vocal settings are active. 66 CVP-701 Reference Manual To get the most convenient use of this Talk function, use the [1] button to assign one of the pedals (Left, Center, or AUX) to “TALK” in the following display: [DIRECT ACCESS] → press one of the pedals (Left, Center, or AUX) This allows you to use one of the pedals to switch the Talk function on and off during your performance, without having to call up the menu above. 4 5 Use the [A] – [E] buttons to select the specific row (or group) of parameters to be adjusted. Set the value of specific parameters in the row by using the [1] – [6] buttons. For information on each parameter, see page 67 – 68. NOTICE After setting, go to the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button and save the settings (see below section). The settings will be lost if you exit from this display or turn the power to the instrument off without executing the Save operation. Saving the Microphone Settings All the settings (VOCAL/TALK pages) are saved together as a single file. Up to ten files can be saved. For ease in future recall, you should assign a sufficiently descriptive name to the file or one that matches your performance. 2 7 On the MIC SETTING display (in step 3 above), press the [H] (USER MEMORY) button. Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the file to USER. For details on the naming and deleting procedures, refer to the “Renaming a File/Folder” and “Deleting Files/Folders” sections in the Owner’s Manual. Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – 1 NOTE The microphone setting file can be saved only to the internal USER drive. If you want to save this setting to the USB flash drive, save the User Effect file on the display called up via [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] SETUP FILES → [H] (USER EFFECT FILES) → TAB [L][R] USB → [6] (SAVE). Calling Up the Microphone Settings Saved to USER 1 2 Call up the Mic Setting Memory display by pressing the [H] (USER MEMORY) button on the MIC SETTING display. Use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired setting file. VOCAL Page 3-BAND EQ (selected by [A]/[B] buttons) EQ (Equalizer) is a processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands which can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. This instrument features a high-grade three-band (LOW, MID and HIGH) digital equalizer function for the microphone sound. [1]/ [3]/ [5] Hz Adjusts the center frequency of the corresponding band. [2]/ [4]/ [6] dB Boosts or cuts the level of the corresponding band by up to 12 dB. CVP-701 Reference Manual 67 NOISE GATE (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the microphone falls below a specified level. This effectively cuts off extraneous noise, allowing the desired signal (vocal, etc.) to pass. [1] SW (Switch) Turns the Noise Gate on or off. [2] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level at which the gate begins to open. COMPRESSOR (selected by [C]/[D] buttons) This effect holds down the output when the input signal from the microphone exceeds a specified level. This is especially useful for smoothing out vocals that have widely varying dynamics. It effectively “compresses” the signal, making soft parts louder and loud parts softer. For a maximum compression effect, set RATIO to a high setting and adjust the OUT parameter for optimum volume. [3] SW (Switch) Turns the Compressor on or off. [4] TH. (Threshold) Adjusts the input level above which the Compressor is applied. [5] RATIO Adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios result in a more compressed sound, with a reduced dynamic range. [6] OUT Adjusts the final output level. TALK Page 7 Microphone – Connecting a Microphone and Singing Along with Your Performance – The settings here are for your speech or announcements (NOT your singing performance), and are active when the TALK (page 66) is set to ON. All indications and parameters (with the exception of TALK MIXING below) are the same as in the VOCAL page. However, the settings are independent from those in the VOCAL page. TALK MIXING (selected by [E] button) 68 [1] VOLUME Determines the output volume of the microphone sound. [2] PAN Determines the stereo pan position of the microphone sound. [3] REVERB DEPTH Determines the depth of the reverb effects applied to the microphone sound. [4] CHORUS DEPTH Determines the depth of the chorus effects applied to the microphone sound. [5]/ [6] REDUCTION LEVEL Determines the amount of reduction to be applied to the overall sound (excepting the microphone input) — allowing you to effectively adjust the balance between your voice and the overall instrument sound. CVP-701 Reference Manual Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – Contents Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 • Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Creating a Set of Favorite Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Editing Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Saving the Record as a Single File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 • Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Registering a Song, Audio or Style File (SONG/AUDIO/STYLE) By registering a Song, Audio or Style file in various locations (Preset, User and USB) into Music Finder, you can conveniently and easily call up the file from the Song title. NOTE If you want to register files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 3 4 On the corresponding File Selection display, select a Song, Audio or Style File to be registered to the Music Finder. 8 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – 1 Press the [5] (ADD TO MF) button to register the selected file to Music Finder. The display automatically changes to the Music Finder Record Edit display. Press [8] (OK) button to start the registration. Press the [8] (CANCEL) button to cancel the registration. CVP-701 Reference Manual 69 5 Confirm that the registered file name is shown in the MUSIC column while (SONG), (AUDIO) or the Style name is shown in the STYLE column. Recalling the Registered Data from Music Finder You can recall the registered Song, Audio or Style data in the same way as done in the “Selecting Desired Panel Settings from the Records” and “Searching for the Panel Settings” in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 8. 8 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – NOTE If you want to play back files in the USB flash drive, connect the USB flash drive containing the data to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal beforehand. To play back the registered files • To play back a recalled Song file, press the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button after selecting the SONG record. • To play back a recalled Audio file, press the [J] (AUDIO) button in the MUSIC FINDER display after selecting the AUDIO record. • To play back a recalled Style file, select the Style record then follow the same procedure as in Style playback described in the Owner’s Manual, chapter 3. 70 CVP-701 Reference Manual Creating a Set of Favorite Records As convenient as the Search function is in exploring the depths of the Music Finder records, you may want to create a custom “folder” of your favorite records — so you can quickly call up the panel settings and song data you use frequently. 1 2 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select the desired record. Press the [H] (ADD TO FAVORITE) button to add the selected record to the FAVORITE display, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually add the record. 3 2 Call up the FAVORITE display by using the TAB [L][R] buttons, and check to see if the record has been added. 8 Deleting Records from the FAVORITE Display 1 2 Select the record you want to delete from the FAVORITE display. Press the [H] (DELETE FROM FAVORITE) button, then press the [G] (YES) button to actually delete the record. CVP-701 Reference Manual Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – 3 71 Editing Records You can create a new record by editing the currently selected record. The newly created records are automatically saved in the internal memory. 1 8 Call up the MUSIC FINDER display by pressing the [MUSIC FINDER] button and select the desired record to be edited. 2 Press the [8] (RECORD EDIT) button to call up the EDIT display. 3 Edit the record as desired. Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – [A] MUSIC Edits the song name. Pressing the [A] button calls up the pop-up window for entering the song name. [B] KEYWORD Edits the keyword. Pressing the [B] button calls up the pop-up window to enter the keyword. [C] STYLE/SONG/ AUDIO Changes the Style in case of STYLE record (panel settings). Pressing the [C] button calls up the Style Selection display. After selecting the desired Style, press the [EXIT] button to return back to the Edit display. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited. [D] BEAT Changes the beat (time signature) of the record for search purposes. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be edited. NOTE Keep in mind that the Beat setting made here is only for the Music Finder search function; this does not affect the actual Beat setting of the Style itself. [E] FAVORITE Selects whether the edited record is entered to the FAVORITE display or not. [1] TEMPO Changes the Tempo. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed. [2] SECTION Selects the section that will automatically be called up set when the record is selected. This is useful, for example, when you want to have a selected Style automatically be set up to start with an Intro section. For SONG or AUDIO records, this field cannot be changed. [5]/ [6] GENRE Selects the desired genre. [7] GENRE NAME Creates a new genre. [I] DELETE RECORD Deletes the currently selected record. [4] 72 CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 Enter the edits you’ve made to the record as described below. Creating a new record Press the [J] (NEW RECORD) button. The record is added to the ALL display. If you’ve entered the record to the FAVORITE display in step 3, the record is added to both the ALL display and the FAVORITE display. Overwriting an existing record Press the [8] (OK) button. If you set the record as a Favorite in step 3, the record is added to the FAVORITE display. When you edit the record in the FAVORITE display, the record is overwritten. To cancel and quit the Edit operation, press the [8] (CANCEL) button. Saving the Record as a Single File The Music Finder feature handles all the Records including the presets and additionally created records as a single file. Keep in mind that individual records (panel settings and song data) cannot be handled as separate files. 1 2 3 Call up the Save display. [MUSIC FINDER] → [7] FILES Press the TAB [L][R] buttons to select the location for saving (USER or USB). Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the current file. All records are saved together as a single file. 8 1 2 3 Music Finder – Calling Up Ideal Setups (Voice, Style, etc.) for Each Song – Calling Up Music Finder Records Saved to USER or USB Call up the File Selection display. [MUSIC FINDER] → [7] FILES Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to select USER or USB. Press the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Music Finder file. When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button. [F] REPLACE All Music Finder records currently in the instrument are deleted and replaced with the records of the selected file. NOTICE Selecting “REPLACE” automatically deletes all your original records from internal memory. Make sure that all important data has been archived to another location beforehand. [G] APPEND The records called up are added to the record currently in the instrument. [H] CANCEL Selecting this button aborts the operation (the selected file is not called up). CVP-701 Reference Manual 73 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – Contents Deleting or Renaming the Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Confirming the Registration Memory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 • Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 • Saving the Registration Sequence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Deleting or Renaming the Registration 1 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the Registration Memory bank which contains the Registration you want to delete or rename. 1 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 3 2 NOTE No Registration banks will be shown in this display unless you have saved one or more beforehand. 2 3 74 Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [7] (EDIT) button to call up the REGISTRATION EDIT display. Registrations in the selected bank will be displayed. CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 To delete the Registration, press the [5] (DELETE) button; to rename it, press the [1] (NAME) button. 5 5 Select a Registration you want to delete or rename by pressing one of the [A] – [D] and [F] – [I] buttons. The subsequent procedures are basically the same as those of renaming or deleting files described in the Owner’s Manual. Confirming the Registration Memory Information You can call up the information display to take a look which Voices and Style are memorized to the [1] – [8] buttons of a Registration Memory Bank. 1 Simultaneously press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons to call up the Registration Bank Selection display, then use the [A] – [J] buttons to select the desired Bank. 9 NOTE You can instantly call up the information display of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank by pressing the [DIRECT ACCESS] button and one 2 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons in sequence. Call up MENU1 at the right bottom of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. 4 3 3 4 2 Press the [6] (INFO) button to call up the information display. By using the TAB [L][R] buttons, you can switch between the two information display pages: information for the Registration Memory [1] – [4] buttons and information for the [5] – [8] buttons. Press the [F] (CLOSE) button to close the information display. NOTE If certain Voice parts are set to off, the Voice part names for the corresponding parts are shown in gray. CVP-701 Reference Manual 75 Disabling Recall of Specific Items (Freeze) Registration Memory lets you recall all the panel setups you made with a single button press. However, there may be times that you want certain items to remain the same, even when switching Registration Memory setups. For example, you may want to switch Voices or effect settings while keeping the same accompaniment Style. This is where the Freeze function comes in handy. It lets you maintain the settings of certain items and leave them unchanged, even when selecting other Registration Memory buttons. 1 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE → TAB [L][R] FREEZE Determine the items to be “frozen.” Select the desired item by using the [1] – [3] buttons, then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [4]/[5] (MARK ON)/[4]/[5] (MARK OFF) buttons. 3 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 3 Press the [F] (REGISTRATION FREEZE) button to turn the Freeze function on. 4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. Calling Up Registration Memory Numbers in Order (Registration Sequence) As convenient as the Registration Memory buttons are, there may be times during a performance when you want to quickly switch between settings — without having to take your hands from the keyboard. The convenient Registration Sequence function lets you call up the eight setups in any order you specify, by simply using the TAB [L][R] buttons or the pedal as you play. 1 2 76 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display, then select the desired Registration Memory bank to program a sequence. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [C] REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE → TAB [L][R] REGISTRATION SEQUENCE CVP-701 Reference Manual 3 If you intend to use a pedal to switch Registration Memory settings, specify here how the pedal will be used — to advance or to reverse through the sequence. Use the [C] (REGIST+ PEDAL) button to select the pedal for advancing through the sequence. Use the [D] (REGIST- PEDAL) button to select the pedal for reversing through the sequence. Indicates the name of the currently selected Registration Memory Bank. 6 3 4 NOTE If you assign the function to a pedal here, the other function set in the PEDAL display (page 88) becomes invalid. 4 Use the [E] (SEQUENCE END) button to determine how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence. • STOP Pressing the TAB [R] button or the “advance” pedal has no effect. The sequence is “stopped.” • TOP The sequence starts again at the beginning. • NEXT BANK The sequence automatically moves to the beginning of the next Registration Memory Bank in the same folder. Program the Sequence order, from left to right. Press one of the REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] – [8] buttons on the panel, then press the [6] (INSERT) button to input the number. 9 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 5 Indicates the Registration Memory numbers, in the order of the current Registration Sequence. [1] – [4] CURSOR Moves the cursor. [5] REPLACE Replaces the number at the cursor position with the currently selected Registration Memory number. [6] INSERT Inserts the number of the currently selected Registration Memory number before the cursor position. [7] DELETE Deletes the number at the cursor position. [8] CLEAR Deletes all numbers in the sequence. 6 Press the [F] button to turn the Registration Sequence function on. 7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the operation display. NOTE If you do not close the setting display and it remains open, you cannot call up the Registration Sequence even when you press the pedal. CVP-701 Reference Manual 77 Confirming the Registration Sequence Setting in the Main Display In the Main display, you can confirm whether the Registration Memory numbers are called up according to the sequence programmed on pages 76 – 77. The Registration Sequence is indicated at the top right of the Main display, letting you confirm the currently selected number. To shift the Registration Memory numbers, use the TAB [L][R] buttons when the Main display is shown. When pedal operation has been set in step 3 on page 77, you can also use a pedal to select the Registration Memory numbers in order. Pressing the TAB [L] and [R] buttons simultaneously when the Main display is shown cancels the currently selected Sequence number (the box indicator at the top right goes out). The first Sequence will be selected by pressing one of the TAB [L][R] buttons or by pressing the pedal. NOTE The pedal can be used for Registration Sequence no matter which display is called up (except for the display in step 3 on page 77). Saving the Registration Sequence Settings The settings for the Sequence order and how Registration Sequence behaves when reaching the end of the sequence (SEQUENCE END) are included as part of the Registration Memory Bank file. To store your newly programmed Registration Sequence, save the current Registration Memory Bank file. NOTICE Keep in mind that all Registration Sequence data is lost when changing Registration Memory Banks, unless you’ve saved it with the Registration Memory Bank file. 9 1 Registration Memory – Saving and Recalling Custom Panel Setups – 2 3 78 Press the REGIST BANK [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to call up the REGISTRATION BANK Selection display. Call up MENU2 at the bottom right of the display by pressing the [8] button as necessary. Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the Bank file. CVP-701 Reference Manual Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Contents Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – • Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 • Changing the Voice for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Editing FILTER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Editing TUNE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Editing EFFECT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 • Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 • Creating an Original Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Editing EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Selecting the Master EQ Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Editing Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 • Saving Master Compressor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 The MIXING CONSOLE display called up via the [MIXING CONSOLE] button consists of several pages of parameters. Use the TAB [L]/[R] buttons to call up the desired page, and set various parameters for each part to adjust the balance between parts and create your desired sound. Note that the Save operation for your settings will differ depending on the part. For instructions, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Editing VOL/VOICE Parameters 10 Adjusting Panning/Volume for Each Part 1 Press the [D] (or [I]) button to select the PANPOT parameter or press the [E] (or [J]) button to select the VOLUME parameter. PANPOT VOLUME 2 Use the [1] – [8] buttons to adjust panning/volume for the desired part. NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button. 3 Save your settings. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10. CVP-701 Reference Manual 79 Changing the Voice for Each Part You can change the Voice for each keyboard part, Style channel or Song channel. 1 Press the [C] (or [H]) button to select the VOICE parameter. 1 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 2 2 3 Press one of the [1] – [8] buttons to select the desired part. The Voice Selection display appears. Select a Voice. Press one of the Voice category selection buttons on the panel, then select a Voice by using the [A] – [J] buttons. NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1- 8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button. NOTE Some Voices (such as Organ Flutes) cannot be selected for Style channels. NOTE Only Drum kit Voices and SFX kit Voices can be assigned to the RHY2 channel in the STYLE PART display. NOTE When playing GM Song data, channel 10 can only be used for a Drum kit Voice. 4 10 5 80 Press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIXING CONSOLE display. Save your settings. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 10. CVP-701 Reference Manual [A] PART This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual. [D]/[I] HARMONIC CONTENT Allows you to adjust the resonance effect (page 14) for each part. [E]/[J] BRIGHTNESS Determines the brightness of the sound for each part by adjusting the cutoff frequency (page 14). Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Editing FILTER Parameters Editing TUNE Parameters 10 [A]/[B]/ [F]/[G] PORTAMENTO TIME Portamento is a function that creates a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Time determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time. Setting this to “0” results in no effect. This parameter is available when the selected keyboard part is set to Mono. [C]/[H] PITCH BEND RANGE Determines the range of the PITCH BEND for each keyboard part (when a pedal is assigned to this function; page 88). The range is from “0” to “12” with each step corresponding to one semitone. [D]/[I] OCTAVE Determines the range of the pitch change in octaves, over two octaves up or down for each keyboard part. [E]/[J] TUNING Determines the pitch of each keyboard part. [1] – [3] TRANSPOSE Allows you to set transposition for overall sound of the instrument (MASTER), Song playback (SONG), or the keyboard pitch (KBD), respectively. CVP-701 Reference Manual 81 Editing EFFECT Parameters This instrument has an effect system featuring six separate blocks (Reverb, Chorus and DSP1-4). For each block, you can assign the desired effect type individually. The effects are applied independently for each part or globally for the entire sound according to the blocks: the effects of Reverb and Chorus blocks are applied to all of the parts input to the Mixing Console, DSP1 is applied only to the Style and Song sounds (or applied to a specific part of the Style or Song depending on the setting), and DSP2-4 are applied to the specific keyboard parts and Song parts. Use these instructions to set up various effects for blocks and parts to enhance the sound as desired. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block NOTE When the display for SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected, you can switch between the two by pressing the [A] (PART) button. 1 Press the [F] (TYPE) button in the EFFECT Page of the Mixing Console display. The Effect Type Selection display is called up. 2 10 2 82 3 4 5 Use the [1]/[2] buttons to select the effect BLOCK. Effect Block Applicable parts Effect characteristics REVERB All parts Reproduces the warm ambience of playing in a concert hall or jazz club. CHORUS All parts Produces a rich, “fat” sound as if several identical instruments are being played simultaneously. In addition, other type effects (such as reverb, delay, etc.) can also be selected in this effect block. DSP1 STYLE PART, SONG CHANNEL 1-16 This effect is applied only to Style/Song parts. When the “Connection” parameter selected in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” section (on page 83) is set to “System,” the DSP1 effect will be applied overall to the Style and Song. When it is set to “Insertion,” the DSP1 effect will be applied to a specific part of the Style or Song. DSP2-4 RIGHT 1, RIGHT 2, LEFT, SONG CHANNEL 1-16 For each of DSP2-4, you can select one of the parts or channels listed at left. When you select “RIGHT2” for DSP2, for example, the DSP2 Effect is applied only to the Right 2 part. Note that if you select a Song or Style which requires the DSP2-4 Blocks, the part assignment of these three Blocks will be changed automatically with last priority according to the data. CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 5 Use the [3]/[4] buttons to select the part to which you want to apply the effect. Note that a part cannot be selected if “REVERB” or “CHORUS” is selected, or if the CONNECTION parameter of “DSP1” is set to “System” (in step 3 of “Creating an Original Effect” below). This is because only one of the Effect Types can be selected to be commonly applied to all available Parts. Use the [5]/[6] buttons to select the effect CATEGORY. Use the [7]/[8] buttons to select the effect TYPE. If you want to edit the effect parameters, go on to the next operation. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 3 Creating an Original Effect 1 2 Once you’ve selected an Effect Block and Effect Type above, press the [F] button to call up the display for editing the effect parameters. Select the desired parameter for editing by using the [2] – [4] buttons, then adjust the value by using the [5]/[6] buttons. If you have selected the REVERB, CHORUS or DSP1 effect block, you can adjust the Effect Return Level by pressing [7] button. 10 NOTE Keep in mind that in some cases noise may result if you adjust the effect parameters while playing the instrument. 4 2 3 If DSP 2 – 4 is selected as the Effect Block, edit the Variation parameter if desired. Press the [7] (VARI. DETAIL) button to call up the Variation parameter, select a parameter via the [2] – [4] buttons, and then use the [5]/[6] buttons to edit the value. This parameter is effective only when the DSP VARIATION in the VOICE EFFECT display is set to on. To close the Variation parameter display, press the [EXIT] button. CVP-701 Reference Manual 83 4 Press the [I] (SAVE) button to call up the display for saving your original effect. 4, 6 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 5 5 6 Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the destination for saving the effect. The maximum number for effects that can be saved differs depending on the effect block. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to save the effect. In the Naming window called up via this operation, assign the name to the User Effect Type then press the [8] (OK) button to save the User Effect Type. If you want to call up the User Effect Type saved here, use the same procedure as in steps 4 – 5 of “Selecting an Effect Type for Each Block.” Editing EQ Parameters 10 [A] PART This will be displayed only if SONG CH 1-8 or SONG CH 9-16 is selected for the part. Toggles between the two channel displays: SONG CH 1-8 and SONG CH 9-16. For details, refer to chapter 10 in the Owner’s Manual. [D]/[I] EQ HIGH Boosts or attenuates the high EQ band for each part. [E]/[J] EQ LOW Boosts or attenuates the low EQ band for each part. Equalizer (also called “EQ”) is a sound processor that divides the frequency spectrum into multiple bands that can be boosted or cut as required to tailor the overall frequency response. Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound from speakers to match the special character of the room. For example, you can cut some of the low range frequencies when playing in large spaces where the sound is too “boomy,” or boost the high frequencies in rooms and close spaces where the sound is relatively “dead” and free of echoes. 84 CVP-701 Reference Manual Selecting the Master EQ Type The instrument possesses a high-quality five-band digital EQ. With this function, a final effect — tone control — can be added to the output of your instrument. You can select one of the five preset EQ settings in the MEQ display. You can even create your own custom EQ settings by adjusting the frequency bands, and save the settings to one of two User Master EQ types. Gain Bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”) Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 0 Freq (Frequency) 5 bands → 1 LOW EQ1 LOWMID EQ2 MID EQ3 HIGHMID EQ4 HIGH EQ5 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select a preset Master EQ type. • FLAT: Flat EQ settings. The gain of each frequency is set to 0dB. • LOW CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the low frequencies, making the sound clearer. • LOW BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the low frequencies, making the sound more powerful. • HIGH CUT: EQ setting for decreasing the level of the high frequencies, making the sound more mellow. • HIGH BOOST: EQ setting for boosting the level of the high frequencies, making the sound brighter. • USER1/2: Your own custom EQ settings saved in step 4. The set parameters of the selected Master EQ type are automatically shown at the bottom of the display. 1 10 4 3 2, 3 2 3 4 Use the [E]/[J] buttons to move the cursor to the GAIN row, then use the [1] – [5] buttons to adjust the GAIN level to boost or cut each of the five bands. To boost or cut all the five bands at the same time, use the [6]/[7] buttons. Adjust the Q (bandwidth) and the FREQ (center frequency) of the band selected in step 2. To adjust the bandwidth (also called “Shape” or “Q”), use the [C]/[H] buttons to move the cursor to the Q row, then use the [2] – [4] buttons. The higher the value of Q, the narrower the band width. To adjust the FREQ (center frequency), use the [D]/[I] buttons to move the cursor to the FREQ row, then use the [1] – [5] buttons. The available FREQ range is different for each band. Press the [F] or [G] (STORE 1 or 2) button to save the edited Master EQ type. In the Naming display called up via this operation, assign the name then press the [8] (OK) button to store your settings as a User Master EQ Type, which can be called up via the [A]/[B] buttons. CVP-701 Reference Manual 85 Editing Master Compressor Settings Compressor is an effect commonly used to limit and compress the dynamics (softness/loudness) of an audio signal. For signals that vary widely in dynamics, such as vocals and guitar parts, it “squeezes” the dynamic range, effectively making soft sounds louder and loud sounds softer. When used with gain to boost the overall level, this creates a more powerful, more consistently high-level sound. This instrument features a Master Compressor which is applied to the entire sound of this instrument. Although preset Master Compressor settings are provided, you can also create and save your original Master Compressor by adjusting the related parameters. NOTE Master Compressor cannot be applied to an audio file or the Metronome sound. Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – The indication “GAIN REDUCTION” shows the Gain Reduction (compressed level) while “OUTPUT” shows the output level according to the instrument sound in real time. 10 86 [F] ON/OFF Turns the Master Compressor effect on or off. [1]/ [2] TYPE Selects a Master Compressor type. [3]/ [4] THRESHOLD OFFSET Determines the threshold (minimum level at which compression starts). [5]/ [6] RATIO OFFSET Determines the ratio of compression (how much the dynamic range is compressed). [7]/ [8] OUTPUT GAIN OFFSET Determines the output level. CVP-701 Reference Manual Saving Master Compressor Settings The Master Compressor settings you have edited on page 86 can be saved as a User Compressor type. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to enter the USER MASTER COMPRESSOR display. 1 Mixing Console – Editing the Volume and Tonal Balance – 1 3 2 2 3 4 5 Select the destination to which the User Master Compressor is to be saved, by using the [3] – [6] buttons. Press the [I] (SAVE) button to open the SAVE display. Enter the name of the edited Compressor type, then press the [8] (OK) button to actually save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous display. The saved Compressor type is shown in the TYPE selection at the bottom left of the display and can be selected in the same way as the preset types. CVP-701 Reference Manual 10 87 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Contents Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 • Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Wireless LAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – • Infrastructure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 • Ad Hoc Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 • MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 • MIDI Transmit Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 • MIDI Receive Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 • Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 • Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Footswitch/Foot Controller Settings Assigning Specific Functions to Each Foot Pedal In addition to the footswitch or foot controller, the three piano pedals installed to the instrument (Right, Center and Left pedals) can also be assigned to various functions here. The following explanations cover the related operations and assignable functions (parameters). NOTE For information on how to connect a Footswitch or Foot Controller, refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11. 1 11 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [D] CONTROLLER → TAB [L][R] PEDAL Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select one of the three pedals or the AUX-connected pedal, to which the function is to be assigned. 2 5 6 3 88 CVP-701 Reference Manual 4 3 Use the [1] buttons to select the function to be assigned to the pedal specified in step 2. For information on available parameters, see pages 89 – 91. NOTE You can also assign other functions to the pedal — Punch in/out of Song (page 57) and Registration Sequence (page 76). If you assign multiple func- tions to the pedal, the priority is: Punch in/out of Song → Registration Sequence → functions assigned here. 5 6 Use the [2] – [8] buttons to set the details of the selected functions (the part for which the function is applied, etc.). The available parameters differ depending on the function selected in step 3. When you have selected the left or center pedal in step 2, press the [H] (SWITCH WITH R1 VOICE) button to turn this parameter OFF. This setting locks the pedal function so that it does not change automatically when you change the Right 1 Voice. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 4 If necessary, set the polarity of the pedal by using the [I] button. Pedal on/off operation may differ depending on the particular pedal you’ve connected to the instrument. For example, pressing down on one pedal may turn the selected function on, while pressing a different make/brand of pedal may turn the function off. If necessary, use this setting to reverse the operation.  Assignable Pedal Functions For functions indicated with “*”, use only the foot controller; proper operation cannot be done with a footswitch. ARTICULATION When you use a Super Articulation Voice that has an effect assigned to the pedal/footswitch, you can enable the effect by pressing the pedal/footswitch. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. VOLUME* Allows you to use a foot controller to control the volume. This function is available only for the pedal connected to the instrument’s AUX PEDAL jack. SUSTAIN Allows you to use a pedal to control the sustain. When you press and hold the pedal, all notes played on the keyboard have a longer sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. If you are using the right pedal or connected foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter allows you to specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the damper effect starts working. SOSTENUTO 11 Allows you to use a pedal to control the Sostenuto effect. If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. However, all subsequent notes will not sustain. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato. NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals. SOFT Allows you to use a pedal to control the Soft effect. Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and changes the timbre of the notes you play. This is effective only for certain appropriate Voices. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. If you are using the right pedal or connected foot controller, the “HALF PEDAL POINT” parameter allows you to specify how far down you should press on the pedal until the soft effect starts working. CVP-701 Reference Manual 89 GLIDE When the pedal is pressed, the pitch changes, and then returns to normal pitch when the pedal is released. The following parameters can be set for this function on this display. UP/DOWN Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. ON SPEED Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is pressed. OFF SPEED Determines the speed of the pitch change when the pedal is released. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2 Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part. PORTAMENTO The portamento effect (a smooth slide between notes) can be produced while the pedal is pressed. Portamento is produced when notes are played legato style (i.e., a note is played while the preceding note is still held). The portamento time can also be adjusted form the Mixing Console display (page 81). This function does not affect certain Natural Voices, which would not sound appropriately with this function. NOTE This function will not affect any of the Organ Flutes, Super Articulation Voices and only some of the Super Articulation Voices, even if this has been assigned to the Foot Pedals. PITCH BEND* Allows you to bend the pitch of notes up or down by using the pedal. This function can be assigned to the right pedal or connected foot controller. The following parameters can be set for this function on this display. UP/DOWN Determines whether the pitch change goes up (is raised) or down (is lowered). RANGE Determines the range of the pitch change, in semitones. LEFT, RIGHT 1, 2 Turns this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part. 11 90 MODULATION* Applies a vibrato effect to notes played on the keyboard. Moreover, various effects can be added to the Super Articulation Voice. The effect becomes deeper when pressing down the foot controller. You can turn this pedal function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. MODULATION (ALT) This is a slight variation on MODULATION above, in which the effects (waveform) can be switched on/off by each press of the pedal/footswitch. The modulation effect is alternately turned on and off each time the pedal/footswitch is pressed. You can turn this function on or off for each keyboard part on this display. DSP VARIATION Switches Voice Effect DSP VARIATION on and off. VIBE ROTOR ON/OFF Switches the VIBRATE SW parameter on and off when the VIBE VIBRATE effect type is selected. KEYBOARD HARMONY Switches the Harmony or Echo effect on and off. TALK Switches the microphone setup settings between Vocal and Talk. CVP-701 Reference Manual While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous score page (one page at a time). LYRICS PAGE +/- While the Song is stopped, you can turn to the next/previous lyrics page (one page at a time). SONG PLAY/PAUSE Same as the SONG CONTROL [PLAY/PAUSE] button. STYLE START/STOP Same as the STYLE [START/STOP] button. TAP TEMPO Same as the [TAP TEMPO] button. SYNCHRO START Same as the [SYNC START] button. SYNCHRO STOP Same as the [SYNC STOP] button. INTRO 1–3 Same as the INTRO [I]–[III] buttons. MAIN A–D Same as the MAIN VARIATION [A]–[D] buttons. FILL DOWN Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate left. FILL SELF Plays a fill-in. FILL BREAK Plays a break. FILL UP Plays a fill-in, which is automatically followed by the Main section of the button on the immediate right. ENDING1–3 Same as the ENDING/rit. [I]–[III] buttons. FADE IN/OUT Switches Fade In /Fade Out function on and off. FINGERD/FING ON BASS The pedal alternately switches the Chord Fingering types between the Fingered and Fingering On Bass. BASS HOLD While the pedal is pressed, the Accompaniment Style bass note will be held even if the chord is changed during Style playback. If the fingering is set to “AI FULL KEYBOARD,” the function does not work. PERCUSSION The pedal plays a percussion instrument selected by the [4] – [8] buttons. You can use the keyboard to select the desired percussion instrument. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – SCORE PAGE +/- 11 NOTE When you select the percussion instrument by pressing a key on the keyboard, the velocity with which you press the key determines the percussion volume. RIGHT 1 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 1] button. RIGHT 2 ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [RIGHT 2] button. LEFT ON/OFF Same as the PART ON/OFF [LEFT] button. OTS +/- Calls up the next/previous One Touch Setting. CVP-701 Reference Manual 91 Wireless LAN Settings By using a USB wireless LAN adaptor UD-WL01 (sold separately), you can connect this instrument with an iPhone/iPad via a wireless network. For general operating instructions, refer to the iPhone/iPad Connection Manual. This section covers only operations that are specific to this instrument. Before starting operations, make sure that the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal and call up the setup display via [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU 2 → [H] WIRELESS LAN. NOTE If the USB wireless LAN adaptor is not recognized by the instrument, “WIRELESS LAN” for the [H] button is not shown. When “WIRELESS LAN” is not shown even though a USB wireless LAN adaptor has been connected, turn the instrument off then on again. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Infrastructure Mode [A]/[B] 11 Selects the network. [G] UPDATE Updates the network list on the display. [I] DETAIL Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the [7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them. IP ADDRESS: Sets the IP address and other related parameters. OTHERS: When the instrument is connected to the network with the Infrastructure Mode, the current time is shown on the Main display. You can set the Time Zone via the [B] button and Daylight Saving Time via the [C] button for your local time. [1]/ [2] WPS Connects this instrument to the network via WPS. After pressing this button, press the WPS button on your access point within two minutes. NOTE Make sure that your access point supports WPS. About the confirmation and changes in the access point settings, refer to the manual of the access point. 92 [3]/ [4] MODE CHANGE Switches to the Ad Hoc Mode. [5]/ [6] INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status. CVP-701 Reference Manual [7]/ [8] CONNECT Connects to the selected network. If you select “Other” by using the [A]/[B] buttons, this calls up the Manual Setup display in which you set the SSID, security method, and password. After entering those, press one of the [7]/[8] buttons in the Manual Setup display to connect to the network. [I] DETAIL Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – Ad Hoc Mode Sets the detailed parameters. After making these settings, press one of the [7]/[8] (SAVE) button to actually save them. WIRELESS NETWORK: Sets the SSID, security, password, and channel. IP ADDRESS: Sets the IP address and other related parameters. OTHERS: Enters the Host name or shows MAC address, etc. [3]/ [4] MODE CHANGE Switches to the Infrastructure Mode. [5]/ [6] INITIALIZE Initializes the connection setup to the default factory status. CVP-701 Reference Manual 11 93 MIDI Settings In this section, you can make MIDI-related settings for the instrument. This instrument gives you a set of ten pre-programmed templates that let you instantly and easily reconfigure the instrument to match your particular MIDI application or external device. Also, you can edit the pre-programmed templates and save up to ten of your original templates to the USER display. NOTE You can save all your original templates as a single file to USB flash drive: [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] SETUP FILES → [G] MIDI SETUP FILES. See page 106. 1 Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [I] MIDI Select a pre-programmed template from the PRESET Page (page 95). If you have already created an original template and saved it to the USER Page, you can also select that template from the USER Page. 2 6 11 3 Press the [8] (EDIT) button to call up the MIDI display to edit the selected template. 4 Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to call up the relevant setting display. 5 6 94 3 • SYSTEM MIDI System Settings (page 96) • TRANSMIT MIDI Transmission Settings (page 97) • RECEIVE MIDI Reception Settings (page 98) • BASS Settings for the bass note of chord for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99) • CHORD DETECT Settings for the chord type for Style playback via MIDI reception data (page 99) When you’ve finished editing, press the [EXIT] button to return to the MIDI template Selection display. Select the USER tab display by using the TAB [L][R] buttons, then press the [6] (SAVE) button to save the edited template. CVP-701 Reference Manual All Parts Transmits all parts including the keyboard parts (RIGHT 1, 2, and LEFT), with the exception of Song parts. KBD & STYLE Basically the same as “ALL PARTS” with the exception of how keyboard parts are managed. The right-hand parts are handled as “UPPER” instead of RIGHT 1 and 2 and the left-hand part is handled as “LOWER.” Master KBD In this setting, the instrument functions as a “master” keyboard, playing and controlling one or more connected tone generators or other devices (such as a computer/sequencer). Song All transmit channels are set to correspond to Song channels 1–16. This is used to play Song data with an external tone generator and to record Song data to an external sequencer. Clock Ext Playback or recording (Song, Style, etc.) synchronizes with an external MIDI clock instead of the instrument’s internal clock. This template should be used when you wish to set the tempo on the MIDI device connected to the instrument. MIDI Accord1 MIDI accordions allow you to transmit MIDI data and play connected tone generators from the keyboard and bass/chord buttons of the accordion. This template lets you play melodies from the keyboard and control Style playback on the instrument with the left-hand buttons. MIDI Accord2 Basically the same as “MIDI Accord1” above, with the exception that the chord/bass notes you play with your left hand on a MIDI Accordion are recognized also as MIDI note events. MIDI Pedal1 MIDI pedal units allow you play connected tone generators with your feet (especially convenient for playing single note bass parts). This template lets you play/control the chord root in Style playback with a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI Pedal2 This template lets you play the bass part for Style playback by using a MIDI pedal unit. MIDI OFF No MIDI signals are sent or received. CVP-701 Reference Manual Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices –  Pre-programmed MIDI Templates 11 95 MIDI Settings The explanations here apply to the SYSTEM Page in step 4 on page 94. Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the parameters (below), then set the ON/OFF status by using the [1] – [8] buttons. Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 1 Local Control Turns the Local Control for each part on or off. When Local Control is set to “ON,” the keyboard of the instrument controls its own (local) internal tone generator, allowing the internal Voices to be played directly from the keyboard. If you set Local to “OFF,” the keyboard and controllers are internally disconnected from the instrument’s tone generator section so that no sound is output when you play the keyboard or use the controllers. For example, this allows you to use an external MIDI sequencer to play the instrument’s internal Voices, and use the instrument keyboard to record notes to the external sequencer and/or play an external tone generator. 2 Clock setting, etc.  CLOCK Determines whether the instrument is controlled by its own internal clock or a MIDI clock signal received from an external device. INTERNAL is the normal Clock setting when the instrument is being used alone or as a master keyboard to control external devices. If you are using the instrument with an external sequencer, MIDI computer, or other MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it to that device, set this parameter to the appropriate setting: MIDI, USB 1, or USB 2. In this case, make sure that the external device is connected properly (e.g., to the instrument’s MIDI IN terminal), and that it is properly transmitting a MIDI clock signal. When this is set for control by an external device (MIDI, USB 1 or USB 2), the Tempo is indicated as “Ext.” in the Main display. 11 NOTE If the Clock is set to something other than INTERNAL, the Style or Song cannot be played from the panel buttons. NOTE When a USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal, the “WIRELESS LAN” parameter can also be selected.  TRANSMIT CLOCK Turns MIDI clock (F8) transmission on or off. When set to OFF, no MIDI clock or Start/Stop data is transmitted even if a Song or Style is played back.  RECEIVE TRANSPOSE Determines whether or not the instrument’s transpose setting is applied to the note events received by the instrument via MIDI.  START/STOP Determines whether incoming FA (start) and FC (stop) messages affect Song or Style playback. 3 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch)  SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI System Exclusive messages on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI System Exclusive messages generated by external equipment on or off. 96 CVP-701 Reference Manual  CHORD SYS/EX. The “Tx” setting turns MIDI transmission of MIDI Chord System Exclusive data (chord detect, root and type) on or off. The “Rx” setting turns MIDI reception and recognition of MIDI chord exclusive data generated by external equipment on or off. MIDI Transmit Settings Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – The explanations here apply to the TRANSMIT Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will be sent as MIDI data and over which MIDI channel the data will be sent. The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is transmitted on the channel(s). NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle MIDI messages received via the USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn the instrument off then on again. 1 1 1 2 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the part for changing transmit settings. With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual. UPPER A keyboard part played on the right side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices (RIGHT 1 and/or 2). 11 LOWER A keyboard part played on the left side of the keyboard from the Split Point for the Voices. This is not affected by the on/off status of the [ACMP ON/OFF] button. 2 Use the [3] buttons to select a channel via which the selected part will be transmitted. NOTE If the same transmit channel is assigned to several different parts, the transmitted MIDI messages are merged to a single channel — resulting in unex- pected sounds and possible glitches in the connected MIDI device. NOTE Protected Songs cannot be transmitted even if the proper Song channels 1-16 are set to be transmitted. 3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be sent. The following MIDI messages can be set on the TRANSMIT/RECEIVE display. NOTE (Note events) .........page 64 CONTROL CHANGE ......page 64 PROGRAM CHANGE .....page 64 PITCH BEND ...................page 64 AFTER TOUCH................page 64 CVP-701 Reference Manual 97 MIDI Receive Settings The explanations here apply to the RECEIVE Page in step 4 on page 94. This determines which parts will receive MIDI data and over which MIDI channels the data will be received. The dots corresponding to each channel (1–16) flash briefly whenever any data is received on the channel(s). NOTE If “WLAN” is shown, this instrument can handle Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – MIDI messages received via the USB wireless LAN adaptor connected to the [USB TO DEVICE] terminal. When “WLAN” is not shown although the USB wireless LAN adaptor is connected, turn the instrument off then on again. 1 1 1 2 2 3 Use the [A]/[B] buttons or [1]/[2] buttons to select the channel to be received. The instrument can receive MIDI messages over 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) by USB connection. Use the [3] buttons to select the part via which the selected channel will be received. With the exception of the two parts below, the configuration of the parts is the same as those already explained elsewhere in the Owner’s Manual. KEYBOARD The received note messages control the instrument’s keyboard performance. EXTRA PART 1–5 There are five parts specially reserved for receiving and playing MIDI data. Normally, these parts are not used by the instrument itself. The instrument can be used as a 32-channel multi-timbral tone generator by using these five parts in addition to the parts. 11 3 Use the [4] – [8] button to determine the types of data to be received. MIDI transmission/reception via the USB terminal and MIDI terminals The relationship between the [MIDI] terminals and the [USB] terminal which can be used for transmitting/receiving 32 channels (16 channels x 2 ports) of the MIDI messages is as follows:  MIDI reception [MIDI IN] jack  MIDI transmission [USB TO HOST] jack Wireless LAN [MIDI OUT] jack [USB TO HOST] jack Wireless LAN Port handling USB1 USB2 Merge MIDI/USB1/ WLAN 01–16 98 CVP-701 Reference Manual USB2 01–16 MIDI/USB/WLAN 01–16 Setting the Bass Note for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the BASS Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you determine the bass note for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the bass notes of the chords of Style playback. The bass note will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or split point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the bass note is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels . Connections – Using Your Instrument with Other Devices – 1 2 1 2 Use the [A]/[B] buttons to select the channel. Use the [1] – [8] buttons to set the desired channel to ON or OFF. You can also set all channels to OFF by pressing the [I] (ALL OFF) button. Setting the Chord Type for Style Playback via MIDI Receive The explanations here apply to the CHORD DETECT Page in step 4 on page 94. These settings let you determine the chord type for Style playback, based on the note messages received via MIDI. The note on/off messages received at the channel(s) set to “ON” are recognized as the notes for detecting chords in Style playback. The chords to be detected depend on the fingering type. The chord types will be detected regardless of the [ACMP ON/OFF] or Split Point settings. When several channels are simultaneously set to “ON,” the chord type is detected from merged MIDI data received over the channels. 11 The operation procedure is basically the same as that of the BASS display above. CVP-701 Reference Manual 99 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – Contents CONFIG1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 CONFIG2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 PARAMETER LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 OWNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 BACKUP/RESTORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 SETUP FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – CONFIG1 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] CONFIG1 Select the desired parameter: 1 Fade In/Out 2 Metronome 3 Tap Percussion 4 AUTO POWER OFF 5 LCD BRIGHTNESS 12 1 Fade In/Out These parameters determine the behavior when the Style or Song playback is faded in/out. 100 [3] FADE IN TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade in, or go from minimum to maximum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds). [4] FADE OUT TIME Determines the time it takes for the volume to fade out, or go from maximum to minimum (range of 0 – 20.0 seconds). [5] FADE OUT HOLD TIME Determines the time the volume is held at 0 following the fade out (range of 0 – 5.0 seconds). CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 Metronome [2] VOLUME Determines the level of the metronome sound. [3] – [5] SOUND Determines which sound is used for the metronome. BELL OFF..................Conventional metronome sound, with no bell accent. BELL ON ...................Conventional metronome sound, with bell accent. ENGLISH VOICE ......Count in English GERMAN VOICE......Count in German JAPANESE VOICE ....Count in Japanese FRENCH VOICE .......Count in French SPANISH VOICE.......Count in Spanish [6]/ [7] TIME SIGNATURE Determines the time signature of the metronome sound. [2] – [4] PERCUSSION Selects the instrument. [5]/ [6] VELOCITY Sets the velocity. Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 3 Tap Percussion This allows you to set the drum sound and the velocity which will sound when the Tap function is used. 4 AUTO POWER OFF [4]/ [5] AUTO POWER OFF Determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off. The setting range is DISABLED/5/10/15/30/60/120 (minutes). 5 LCD BRIGHTNESS Refer to the Owner’s Manual. 12 CVP-701 Reference Manual 101 CONFIG2 Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] CONFIG2 Select the desired parameter: 1 Speaker 2 Voice Category Button Options/Display-related Settings Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 1 Speaker-related settings [1]/ [2] SPEAKER Determines whether or not the speaker will sound. HEADPHONE SW Speaker sounds normally, but is cut off when headphones are inserted to the PHONES jack. ON: Speaker sound is always on. OFF: Speaker sound is off. You can only hear the instrument sound via the headphones. [3]/ [4] STEREOPHONIC OPTIMIZER 12 Turns the Stereophonic Optimizer on or off. • On......This function is effective on the VRM Voices sounded from the headphone(s) connected to the [PHONE] jack(s). NOTE In case the “Speaker” setting above is “On” and headphone(s) are connected to the [PHONES] jack(s), this function is effective on the VRM Voices from the headphone(s) as well as from the speakers of the instrument. NOTE In case the headphone(s) are connected to the [PHONES] jack(s) and external audio devices are connected to the AUX OUT[L/L+R]/[R] jacks, this function is effective on the VRM Voices from the headphone(s) as well as from the audio devices. • Off .....The effect of Stereophonic Optimizer is not applied. 102 [5]/ [6] AUX IN NOISE GATE This effect mutes the input signal when the input from the AUX IN falls below a specified level. [7] I.A. CONTROL ON/OFF I.A. Control (Intelligent Acoustic Control) is a function which automatically adjusts and controls the sound quality according to the overall volume of the instrument. Even when the volume is low, it permits both low sounds and high sounds to be clearly heard. I.A. Control is effective only from the sound output of the instrument speakers. [8] I.A. CONTROL DEPTH This sets the depth of the I.A. Control. The higher the value, the more clearly that low and high sounds are heard at lower volume levels. CVP-701 Reference Manual 2 Voice Category Button Options/Display-related settings [1] STYLE TEMPO Selects whether the default tempo of each Style is displayed above the Style name or not in the Style Selection display. [2] VOICE NUMBER Determines whether or not the Voice bank and number are shown in the Voice Selection display. This is useful when you want to check which bank select MSB/LSB values and program change number you need to specify when selecting the Voice from an external MIDI device. NOTE The numbers displayed here start from “1.” Accordingly the actual MIDI program change numbers are one lower, since that number system starts from “0.” NOTE For the GS Voices, the Display Voice Number is not available (the program change numbers are not shown). [3] TIME STAMP Determines whether the time stamp of a file is shown on the USER/USB tabs of the File Selection display or not. NOTE When the instrument is connected to a network via the USB wireless LAN adaptor (UD-WL01), the current time is taken from the network and displayed. VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS Determines how the Voice Selection display is opened when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed. OPEN & SELECT Opens the Voice Selection display with the previously selected Voice in the Voice category automatically selected (when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed). Utility / System – Making Global Settings – [5]/ [6] OPEN ONLY Opens the Voice Selection display with the currently selected Voice (when one of the VOICE buttons is pressed). [7]/ [8] POPUP DISPLAY TIME Determines the time which elapses before the pop-up windows close. (Pop-up windows are displayed when you press buttons such as TEMPO, TRANSPOSE, etc.) 12 CVP-701 Reference Manual 103 PARAMETER LOCK Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] PARAMETER LOCK Utility / System – Making Global Settings – This function is used to “lock” specific parameters (effect, split point, etc.) to make them selectable only via the panel control — in other words, instead of being changed via Registration Memory, One Touch Setting, Music Finder, or Song and sequence data. Use the [3] – [6] buttons to select the desired parameter, then enter or remove the checkmark by using the [7]/[8] (mark on) and [7]/[8] (mark off) buttons. USB You can set or execute important USB media-related operations for the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY → TAB [L][R] USB 12 [A]/[B] DRIVE LIST Selects the desired USB flash drive for checking the remaining memory of (see “PROPERTY” below) or for formatting (see the Owner’s Manual). [F] PROPERTY Opens the Property display of the USB flash drive selected by [A]/[B] buttons, from which you can check the amount of remaining memory. NOTE The displayed remaining memory value is an approximate value. 104 CVP-701 Reference Manual [H] FORMAT Formats the USB flash drive selected by [A]/[B] buttons. Refer to the Owner’s Manual, chapter 11. [3]/ [4] SONG AUTO OPEN Turns the Song Auto Open function on or off. When this is set to “ON” and the USB flash drive selected in the Drive List above is inserted, the instrument automatically calls up the first MIDI Song in the USB flash drive. OWNER [I] OWNER NAME Allows you to enter your name as the owner. The Owner name is indicated on the opening display when you turn the power on. Refer to the Owner’s Manual. [4]/ [5] LANGUAGE Determines the language used for the display messages. Once you change this setting, all messages will be shown in the selected language. [7]/ [8] VERSION Displays the version number of this instrument. Utility / System – Making Global Settings – Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] OWNER 12 BACKUP/RESTORE Refer to the Owner’s Manual. CVP-701 Reference Manual 105 SETUP FILES For the items below, you can save your Original Settings as a Single File for future recall. 1 2 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – 3 Make all desired settings on the instrument. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] SETUP FILES Press one of the [F] – [I] buttons to call up the relevant display for saving your data. [F] SYSTEM SETUP FILES Parameters set on the various displays such as the [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU1 → [J] UTILITY are handled as a single System Setup file. Refer to the Data List for details on which parameters belong to the System Setup. [G] MIDI SETUP FILES The MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the USER tab display are handled as a single file. [H] USER EFFECT FILES The User Effect settings including the following data are managed as a single file. • User Effect Types .........................page 83 • User Master EQ Types ................page 85 • User Compressor Types...............page 86 12 • User Microphone Settings ...........page 67 [I] 4 5 6 106 MUSIC FINDER FILES All the preset and created records of the Music Finder are handled as a single file. Use the TAB [L][R] buttons to select one of the tabs (other than PRESET) to which your settings will be saved. Press the [6] (SAVE) button to save your file. To recall your file, press the desired [F] – [I] buttons in the SETUP FILES display, then select the desired file. If you want to call up the factory default files, select the file in the PRESET tab. When the file is selected, a message is displayed according to the content of the file. Press the desired button. CVP-701 Reference Manual RESET This function lets you restore the status of the instrument to the original factory settings. Call up the operation display. [FUNCTION] → TAB [L][R] MENU2 → [G] SYSTEM → TAB [L][R] RESET 2 1 Utility / System – Making Global Settings – Factory Reset (see below) Select the desired item to be restored by using [1] – [3] buttons and add a checkmark to it by pressing the [4]/[5] button. To remove the checkmark, press the [4]/[5] button. SYSTEM SETUP Restores the System Setup parameters to the original factory settings. Refer to the Data List for details about which parameters belong to the System Setup. MIDI SETUP Restores the MIDI settings including the MIDI templates on the USER tab display to the original factory status. USER EFFECT Restores the User Effect settings including the following data to the original factory settings. • User Effect Types......................... page 83 • User Master EQ Types................ page 85 12 • User Compressor Types .............. page 86 • User Microphone Settings........... page 67 2 MUSIC FINDER Restores the Music Finder data (all records) to the original factory settings. FILES & FOLDERS Deletes all files and folders stored in the USER tab display. REGIST Temporarily deletes the current Registration Memory settings of the selected Bank. The same can be done also by turning the power button ON while holding the B6 key (right-most B key on the keyboard). Press the [I] (FACTORY RESET EXECUTE) button to carry out the Factory Reset operation for all checkmarked items. CVP-701 Reference Manual 107 Index Numerics CHANNEL (Style Creator) ..24, 31, 32 E 1-16 ................................................ 50 Channel Events ..............................60 Echo Types ...................................... 9 4', 2 2/3', 2' ..................................... 17 Channel settings .............................41 EDIT (Registration Memory) ........... 74 CHANNEL TRANSPOSE ...............62 EDIT (Style Creator) ....................... 24 CHORD (Song Creator) ..................50 A Editing Records .............................. 72 CHORD DETECTION AREA ..........21 Editing Styles ................................. 24 ACCENT TYPE .............................. 31 CHORD DETECTION PRIORITY ...42 Editing Voices ................................ 12 Accompaniment ............................. 18 Chord Events ..................................64 EFFECT ......................................... 82 ACMP ON/OFF DEFAULT ............. 19 CHORD NOTE ONLY .......................9 Effect .............................................. 82 Ad Hoc Mode ................................. 93 CHORD ON/OFF ............................38 EFFECT/EQ ............................. 15, 17 ADD TO FAVORITE ...................... 71 CHORD SYS/EX. ...........................97 EG .................................................. 15 ADD TO MF ................................... 69 CHORUS ........................................82 EQ ............................................ 16, 84 AMPLITUDE .................................. 14 CHORUS DEPTH (Voice Set) ........15 EQUAL ........................................... 10 Any Key .......................................... 43 CHORUS DEPTH (VRM Voice) ........6 Equalizer ........................................ 84 APPEND ........................................ 73 CLOCK ...........................................96 EXPAND/COMP. ............................ 31 ARABIC1/2 ..................................... 10 Clock setting ...................................96 ASSEMBLY .............................. 24, 28 COLOR ...........................................39 ASSIGN ........................................... 9 COMMON .......................................13 F Assignable Pedal Functions ........... 89 Compressor ....................................86 Fade In/Out .................................. 100 ATTACK ......................................... 15 CONFIG1 ......................................100 FAST FORWARD TYPE ................ 42 AUTO CH SET ............................... 41 CONFIG2 ......................................102 FILES (Music Finder) ..................... 73 AUTO POWER OFF .................... 101 Connections ....................................88 FILES & FOLDERS ...................... 107 AUX IN NOISE GATE .................. 102 CONTROLLER .........................11, 88 FILTER (Mixing Console) ............... 81 CONTROLLER (Voice Set) ............14 FILTER (Voice Set) ........................ 14 Cool! .................................................4 FINE ............................................... 30 B Follow Lights .................................. 43 BACKUP/RESTORE .................... 105 Foot Controller ............................... 88 BANK ............................................. 74 D FOOTAGE ...................................... 17 BAR CLEAR ................................... 32 Footswitch ...................................... 88 BAR COPY .................................... 32 DAMPER RESONANCE DEPTH (VRM Voice) ..................................6 BASE NOTE .................................. 11 DECAY ...........................................15 BASIC ............................................ 24 DELAY (Vibrato) .............................15 BEAT CONVERTER ...................... 30 DELETE ............26, 51, 61, 63, 75, 77 BLOCK ........................................... 82 Delete (rhythm) ...............................27 BOOST/CUT .................................. 31 DEPTH (Vibrato) .............................15 BRIGHT (Brightness) ..................... 14 DRIVE LIST ..................................104 G BRIGHTNESS ................................ 81 DRUM KIT ........................................7 GM ................................................... 5 Drums ...............................................4 GROOVE ....................................... 24 DSP (Voice Set) .......................15, 16 GUIDE ............................................ 41 DSP1-4 (Mixing Console) ...............82 Guide .............................................. 43 DYNAMICS .....................................31 GUIDE/CHANNEL .......................... 41 C CANCEL (Music Finder) ................. 73 CENTER PEDAL ........................... 14 channel .................................... 38, 39 CHANNEL (Song Creator) ....... 50, 60 108 CVP-701 Reference Manual DYNAMICS CONTROL ..................19 FORMAT ...................................... 105 FREEZE ......................................... 76 Freeze ............................................ 76 FUNCTION ..................................... 14 H Metronome ................................... 101 PEDAL PUNCH IN/OUT .................58 HARMO. (Harmonic content) ..........14 MIC SETTING ................................ 66 Performance Assistant ....................45 HARMONIC CONTENT ..................81 Microphone .................................... 66 PHRASE MARK REPEAT ..............41 Harmony .........................................16 MIDI Settings ................................. 94 PIANO ..............................................6 Harmony Types ................................8 MIDI SETUP ................................ 107 Pitch ..................................................9 headphones ..................................102 MIDI SETUP FILES ...................... 106 PITCH BEND RANGE ....................81 HIGH KEY ......................................37 MIX ................................................. 62 POPUP DISPLAY TIME ...............103 Mixing Console .............................. 79 PORTAMENTO TIME ...............13, 81 MODE ............................................ 17 PROPERTY ..................................104 I MODULATION (Voice Set) ............ 14 Punch In/Out ...................................57 I.A. CONTROL .............................102 MONO/POLY ................................. 13 PURE MAJOR ................................10 Infrastructure ..................................92 Multi Assign Type ............................. 9 PURE MINOR .................................10 MUSIC FINDER ........................... 107 PYTHAGOREAN ............................10 K Karao-Key ......................................43 KEY OFF SAMPLE ..........................7 Music Finder .................................. 69 MUSIC FINDER FILES ................ 106 Music Notation ............................... 38 Q QUANTIZE (Score) .........................39 KEY SIGNATURE ..........................39 QUANTIZE (Song Creator) .............61 KEYBOARD HARMONY ..................8 N QUANTIZE (Style Creator) .............32 KEYBOARD/PANEL .......................11 Natural! ............................................ 3 QUICK START ................................43 KIRNBERGER ................................10 NOTE ....................................... 39, 40 Note Events ................................... 64 L LANGUAGE .................................105 LEFT ...................................14, 38, 39 NOTE LIMIT ................................... 37 NTR (Note Transposition Rule) ...... 35 NTT (Note Transposition Table) ..... 35 LEFT PEDAL ..................................14 R Realtime Recording (Style Creator) .............................25 REC END (Punch Out) ...................57 REC MODE (Song Creator) ............50 LENG (Length) ...............................17 O REC START (Punch In) ..................57 LFO ................................................14 OCTAVE ........................................ 81 RECEIVE TRANSPOSE .................96 Live! ..................................................3 One Touch Setting ......................... 23 Recording (Song Creator) ...............49 Live! Drums ......................................4 Organ Flutes .................................. 17 Recording (Song) ............................46 Live! SFX ..........................................4 Organ Flutes! ................................... 4 Recording (Style Creator) ...............24 Local Control ..................................96 ORIGINAL BEAT ........................... 30 REGIST ........................................107 Loop Recording ..............................25 OTHERS ........................................ 41 REGIST SEQUENCE/FREEZE ......76 LOWER ..........................................21 OTS INFO ...................................... 23 Registration Memory .......................74 LYRICS (Score) ..............................39 OTS LINK TIMING ......................... 19 REGISTRATION SEQUENCE ........76 LYRICS (Song Creator) ..................50 Overdub Recording ........................ 25 Registration Sequence ...................78 Lyrics Events ..................................65 OWNER ....................................... 105 RELES. (Release) ..........................15 LYRICS LANGUAGE .....................42 OWNER NAME ............................ 105 REMOVE EVENT ...........................32 REPEAT MODE ..............................42 Repeat playback .............................41 M P REPERTOIRE ................................22 MANUAL BASS ..............................21 P.A.T. ............................................. 43 REPLACE .......................................73 MARK ON/OFF ..............................11 Pan ................................................. 79 RESET ..........................................107 Master EQ ......................................85 PARAMETER ................................. 24 RESP (Response) ..........................17 MASTER TUNE/SCALE TUNE ........9 PARAMETER LOCK .................... 104 REVERB .........................................82 MEAN-TONE ..................................10 PART OCTAVE .............................. 13 REVERB DEPTH (Voice Set) .........15 MegaVoice .......................................4 PART ON/OFF (Style Setting) ....... 20 REVERB DEPTH (VRM Voice) ........6 MegaVoices ......................................5 PART SELECT .............................. 11 Rhythm ...........................................18 MEQ ...............................................85 PEDAL ........................................... 88 RIGHT ................................14, 38, 39 MESSAGE SW (Message Switch) .......................96 Pedal .............................................. 88 RTR (Retrigger Rule) ......................37 CVP-701 Reference Manual 109 S SYNCHRO STOP WINDOW ..........20 VOICE NUMBER .......................... 103 S.Art! ................................................ 3 SYS/EX. (MIDI) ...............................96 VOICE SET .................................... 12 SAVE ......... 12, 27, 29, 63, 67, 84, 87, 106 SYS/EX. (Song Creator) .................50 Voice Set ........................................ 12 SYSTEM .......................................105 VOICE SET FILTER ....................... 16 Scale .............................................. 10 System ..........................................100 VOICE SETTING .............................. 6 SCALE TUNE ................................ 10 System Exclusive Events ................64 Voices .............................................. 3 SCORE .......................................... 38 SYSTEM SETUP ..........................107 VOL (Volume) ................................ 17 Score .............................................. 38 SYSTEM SETUP FILES ...............106 VOL/VOICE .................................... 79 SECTION SET ............................... 20 VOLUME (Harmony/Echo) ............... 9 SET UP (Score) ............................. 39 VOLUME (Metronome) ................. 101 SETUP ........................................... 50 T SETUP (Song Creator) .................. 59 TALK ...............................................66 SETUP FILES .............................. 106 Tap Percussion .............................101 SFX .................................................. 4 TEMPO (Style Setting) ...................20 Sing ................................................ 66 TIME SIGNATURE .......................101 SIZE ............................................... 39 TIME STAMP ................................103 Song ............................................... 38 TOUCH LIMIT ...................................9 W SONG AUTO OPEN .................... 105 TOUCH SENSE (Voice Set) ...........13 WERCKMEISTER .......................... 10 SONG CREATOR .......................... 50 Touch sensitivity .............................13 WIRELESS LAN ............................. 92 Song Creator .................................. 50 TRACK 1/2 .....................................41 Wireless LAN Settings .................... 92 Song Recording ............................. 46 TRANSMIT CLOCK ........................96 WPS ............................................... 92 SOUND (Metronome) ................... 101 TRANSPOSE .................................11 SOUND (Voice Set) ....................... 14 transpose ........................................11 SOURCE (PLAY) ROOT/ CHORD ...................................... 34 TRANSPOSE (Mixing Console) ......81 SPEAKER .................................... 102 TUNING ..........................................81 Speaker ........................................ 102 tuning ................................................9 Y SPEED (Harmony/Echo) .................. 9 TUNING CURVE ..............................7 Your Tempo ................................... 43 TUNE ........................................11, 81 Volume (Mixing Console) ............... 79 VOLUME (Voice Set) ..................... 13 VOLUME/ATTACK ......................... 17 VRM ............................................. 3, 5 X XG .................................................... 5 SPEED (Vibrato) ............................ 15 SPLIT POINT/CHORD FINGERING .. ..................................................... 21 U START/STOP (MIDI) ...................... 96 UPPER ...........................................21 Step Recording (Song Creator) ...................... 50, 54 USB ..............................................104 Step Recording (Style Creator) ...... 28 USER EFFECT FILES ..................106 STEREOPHONIC OPTIMIZER .... 102 UTILITY ........................................100 STOP ACMP .................................. 19 Utility .............................................100 USER EFFECT .............................107 STRENGTH ................................... 31 STRING RESONANCE DEPTH (VRM Voice) ................................. 6 V Style ............................................... 18 VELOCITY CHANGE ......................32 Style Assembly .............................. 28 VERSION .....................................105 STYLE CREATOR ......................... 24 VIB. SPEED ....................................17 Style Creator .................................. 24 VIBE ROTOR .................................15 Style File Format ............................ 33 VIBRATO ........................................15 Style Playback ............................... 18 VOCAL ...........................................66 STYLE SETTING ........................... 18 Voice (Mixing Console) ...................80 STYLE TEMPO ............................ 103 Super Articulation ........................... 89 VOICE CATEGORY BUTTON OPTIONS ..................................103 Sweet! .............................................. 4 Voice Characteristics ........................3 SWING ........................................... 30 VOICE EFFECT ...............................8 110 CVP-701 Reference Manual Manual Development Department © 2015 Yamaha Corporation Published 7/2015 MW-A0
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110

Yamaha CVP-701 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Instrumentos musicales
Tipo
El manual del propietario